Honeywell CCB02A CHARGE AND COMMUNICATION BASE User Manual UserMan

Honeywell International Inc CHARGE AND COMMUNICATION BASE UserMan

UserMan

™ Xenon™ 1900/1910Xenon™ 1902/1912Granit™ 1910i/1911iArea-Imaging ScannerUser’s Guide
DisclaimerHoneywell International Inc. (“HII”) reserves the right to make changes in speci-fications and other information contained in this document without prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes have been made.  The information in this publication does not repre-sent a commitment on the part of HII.HII shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein; nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnish-ing, performance, or use of this material.This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright.  All rights are reserved.  No part of this document may be photocopied, repro-duced, or translated into another language without the prior written consent of HII. 2010-2012 Honeywell International Inc.  All rights reserved.Web Address: Xenon and Granit are trademarks or registered trademarks of Honeywell Inter-national Inc.Microsoft® Windows®, Windows NT®, Windows 2000, Windows ME, Windows XP,  and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies and are the property of their respective owners.
Product Agency Compliance - Xenon 1900/1910USAFCC Part 15 Subpart B Class BThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.  This equipment generates, uses, and can radi-ate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-tions.  However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equip-ment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.  The user may find the fol-lowing booklet helpful: “Something About Interference.”  This is available at FCC local regional offices.  Honeywell is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equip-ment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Honeywell.  The correction is the responsibil-ity of the user.  Use only shielded data cables with this system.  This unit has been tested with cables less than 3 meters. Cables greater than 3 meters may not meet class B performance.Caution:  Any changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authorization to oper-ate this equipment.UL StatementUL listed: UL60950-1, 2nd Edition.
CanadaIndustry Canada ICES-003This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  Opera-tion is subject to the following conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Conformité à la règlementation canadienneCet appareil numérique de la Classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Son fonctionnement est assujetti aux conditions suivantes :1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer de brouillage préjudiciable.2. Cet appareil doit pouvoir accepter tout brouillage reçu, y compris le brouillage pouvant causer un fonctionnement indésirable.  C-UL Statement C-UL listed: CSA C22.2 No.60950-1-07, 2nd Edition.EuropeThe CE marking indicates compliance to 2004/108/EC EMC Directive with Standards EN55022 CLASS B, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 and 2011/65/EU RoHS directive. In addition, complies to 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive, when shipped with recommended power supply.European contact:Hand Held Products Europe B.V.Nijverheidsweg 9-135627 BT EindhovenThe NetherlandsHoneywell International Inc. shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment (i.e., power supplies, personal computers, etc.) that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive.Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment InformationHoneywell complies with Directive 2002/96/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PAR-LIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 27 January 2003 on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).
This product has required the extraction and use of natural resources for its production. It may contain hazardous substances that could impact health and the environment, if not properly disposed.In order to avoid the dissemination of those substances in our environment and to diminish the pressure on the natural resources, we encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems for product disposal. Those sys-tems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of the product you are dis-posing in a sound way.The crossed out wheeled bin symbol informs you that the product should not be disposed of along with municipal waste and invites you to use the appropriate separate take-back systems for product disposal.If you need more information on the collection, reuse, and recycling sys-tems, please contact your local or regional waste administration.You may also contact your supplier for more information on the environ-mental performances of this product.GermanyIf your product is marked with the GS symbol, then the product has been issued a GS certificate showing compliance to EN 60950-1, Second Edition.This device is not intended for use in direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid distracting reflections at visual display workplaces, this device should not be placed in direct field of view.Australia/NZC-Tick StatementConforms to AS/NZS 3548 EMC requirementMexico  Conforms to NOM-019.Japan
RussiaGost-R certificateSouth KoreaThis product meets Korean agency approval.TaiwanIf the following label is attached to your product, the product meets Taiwan agency approval:BSMI Standard: CNS13438, CNS14336依據標準 : CNS13438, CNS14336InternationalLED Safety StatementLEDs have been tested and classified as “EXEMPT RISK GROUP” to the standard: IEC 62471:2006.CB SchemeCertified to CB Scheme IEC 60950-1, Second Edition.Laser Safety StatementIf the following label is attached to your product, it indicates the product contains a laser engine or laser aimer:This device has been tested in accordance with and complies with IEC60825-1 ed2 (2007) Pulse duration of 15.5 mSec.  Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.LASER LIGHT, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM, CLASS 2 LASER PROD-UCT,  1.0 mW MAX OUTPUT: 650nM. LASER LIGHT. Do Not Stare into Beam. Class 2 Laser Product.1.0 mW Max output: 650nM IEC 60825-1 Ed 2 (2007). Pulseduration of 15.5mSec. Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and  1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.
Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.PatentsFor patent information, please refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/patents.Solids and Water ProtectionThe Xenon 1900 has a rating of IP41, immunity of foreign particles and dripping water.WarningTo reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries, avoid touching sec-tions of the scanner that feel warm.!
Product Agency Compliance - Xenon 1902/1912 and CCB01-010BT BaseUSAFCC Part 15 Subpart CThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Caution: Any changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.Use only shielded data cables with this system. This unit has been tested with cables less than 3 meters. Cables greater than 3 meters may not meet class B performance.UL StatementUL listed: UL60950-1, 2nd Edition.CanadaIndustry CanadaThis device complies with Canadian RSS-210.  Operation is subject to the following conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Conformité à la règlementation canadienneCet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme CNR-210 du Canada.  Son fonc-tionnement est assujetti aux conditions suivantes :1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer de brouillage préjudiciable.2. Cet appareil doit pouvoir accepter tout brouillage reçu, y compris le brouillage pouvant causer un fonctionnement indésirable.
C-UL StatementC-UL listed: CSA C22.2 No.60950-1-07, 2nd Edition for I.T.E. product safety.EuropeThe CE marking on the product indicates that this device is in confor-mity with all essential requirements of the 1999/5/EC R&TTE Directive and 2011/65/EU RoHS directive.  In addition, complies to 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive, when shipped with recommended power supply.  European contact:Hand Held Products Europe B.V.Nijverheidsweg 9-135627 BT EindhovenThe NetherlandsHoneywell shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment (i.e., power supplies, personal computers, etc.) that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive.  This equipment is intended for use throughout the European Community and has been assessed to the following standards:EN 300 328EN 301 489-1 EN 301 489-17 EN60950-1Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment InformationHoneywell complies with Directive 2002/96/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PAR-LIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).This product has required the extraction and use of natural resources for its production. It may contain hazardous substances that could impact health and the environment, if not properly disposed.In order to avoid the dissemination of those substances in our environment and to diminish the pressure on the natural resources, we encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems for product disposal. Those sys-tems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of the product you are dis-posing in a sound way.The crossed out wheeled bin symbol informs you that the product should not be disposed of along with municipal waste and invites you to use the appropriate separate take-back systems for product disposal.
If you need more information on the collection, reuse, and recycling sys-tems, contact your local or regional waste administration.You may also contact your supplier for more information on the environ-mental performances of this product.GermanyIf your product is marked with the GS symbol, then the product has been issued a GS certificate showing compliance to EN 60950-1, Second Edition.This device is not intended for use in direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid distracting reflections at visual display workplaces, this device should not be placed in direct field of view.Australia/NZC-Tick StatementConforms to AS/NZS 3548 EMC requirements.BrazilThis product is approved by Anatel, according to the procedures regulated by Resolution No. 242/2000 and meets the technical requirements applied.Este produto está homologado pela ANATEL, de acordo com os procedi-mentos regulamentados pela Resolução No. 242/2000 e atende aos requi-sitos técnicos aplicados.Para maiores informações, consulte o site da ANATEL – www.anatel.gov.br  ChinaSRRC Radio Certificate.  Modelo: Xenon 19022876-10-6583(01)07898927490072" Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário."
JapanComplies with Technical Regulations Conformity Certification of Specified Radio equipment.KoreaThis product meets Korean agency approval.Mexico  Conforms to NOM-019.  This product meets Cofetel approval.RussiaGost-R certificate.TaiwanIf the following label is attached to your product, the product meets Taiwan agency approval:BSMI Standard: CNS13438, CNS14336 (Xenon 1902 only)依據標準 : CNS13438, CNS14336NCC standard: Low power frequency electric machineries technical standard: LP0002
InternationalLED Safety StatementScanner LEDs have been tested and classified as “EXEMPT RISK GROUP” to the standard: IEC 62471:2006.Radio TechnologyClass IICB SchemeCertified to CB Scheme IEC 60950-1, Second Edition.Laser Safety StatementIf the following label is attached to your product, it indicates the product contains a laser engine or laser aimer:This device has been tested in accordance with and complies with IEC60825-1 ed2 (2007) Pulse duration of 15.5 mSec.  Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.LASER LIGHT, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM, CLASS 2 LASER PROD-UCT,  1.0 mW MAX OUTPUT: 650nM. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.Solids and Water ProtectionThe Xenon 1902 has a rating of IP41, immunity of foreign particles and dripping water. PatentsFor patent information, please refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/patents.WarningTo reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries, avoid touching sections of the scanner that feel warm.LASER LIGHT. Do Not Stare into Beam. Class 2 Laser Product.1.0 mW Max output: 650nM IEC 60825-1 Ed 2 (2007). Pulseduration of 15.5mSec. Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and  1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.!
Product Agency Compliance - Granit 1910iUSAFCC Part 15 Subpart B Class BThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.  This equipment generates, uses, and can radi-ate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-tions.  However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equip-ment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.  The user may find the fol-lowing booklet helpful: “Something About Interference.”  This is available at FCC local regional offices.  Honeywell is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equip-ment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Honeywell.  The correction is the responsibil-ity of the user.  Use only shielded data cables with this system.  This unit has been tested with cables less than 3 meters. Cables greater than 3 meters may not meet class B performance.Caution:  Any changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authorization to oper-ate this equipment.
TÜV-R StatementTÜV R listed: UL 60950-1, Second Edition and CSA C22.2 No.60950-1-07, Second Edition.CanadaIndustry Canada ICES-003This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  Opera-tion is subject to the following conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Conformité à la règlementation canadienneCet appareil numérique de la Classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Son fonctionnement est assujetti aux conditions suivantes :1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer de brouillage préjudiciable.2. Cet appareil doit pouvoir accepter tout brouillage reçu, y compris le brouillage pouvant causer un fonctionnement indésirable.  TÜV-R StatementTÜV R listed: UL 60950-1, Second Edition and CSA C22.2 No.60950-1-07, Second Edition.EuropeThe CE marking indicates compliance to 2004/108/EC EMC Directive with Standards EN55022 CLASS B, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 and 2011/65/EU RoHS directive. In addition, complies to 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive, when shipped with recommended power supply.  European contact:Hand Held Products Europe B.V.Nijverheidsweg 9-135627 BT EindhovenThe NetherlandsHoneywell International Inc. shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment (i.e., power supplies, personal computers, etc.) that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive.TÜV RheinlandCUSTÜV RheinlandCUS
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment InformationHoneywell complies with Directive 2002/96/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PAR-LIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 27 January 2003 on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).This product has required the extraction and use of natural resources for its production. It may contain hazardous substances that could impact health and the environment, if not properly disposed.In order to avoid the dissemination of those substances in our environment and to diminish the pressure on the natural resources, we encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems for product disposal. Those sys-tems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of the product you are dis-posing in a sound way.The crossed out wheeled bin symbol informs you that the product should not be disposed of along with municipal waste and invites you to use the appropriate separate take-back systems for product disposal.If you need more information on the collection, reuse, and recycling sys-tems, please contact your local or regional waste administration.You may also contact your supplier for more information on the environ-mental performances of this product.Australia/NZC-Tick StatementConforms to AS/NZS 3548 EMC requirementRussiaGost-R certificateInternationalLED Safety StatementLEDs have been tested and classified as “EXEMPT RISK GROUP” to the standard: IEC 62471:2006.
CB SchemeCertified to CB Scheme IEC 60950-1, Second Edition.Laser Safety StatementIf the following label is attached to your product, it indicates the product contains a laser engine or laser aimer:This device has been tested in accordance with and complies with IEC60825-1 ed2 (2007).  Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.LASER LIGHT, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM, CLASS 2 LASER PROD-UCT,  1.0 mW MAX OUTPUT: 650nM. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.PatentsFor patent information, please refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/patents.Solids and Water ProtectionThe Granit 1910i has a rating of IP65, totally protected against dust and pro-tected against low pressure water jets.WarningTo reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries, avoid touching sec-tions of the scanner that feel warm.LASER LIGHT. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM. CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT. 1.0MW MAX OUTPUT: 650NM. IEC 60825-1 Ed 2 (2007). Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.!
Product Agency Compliance - Granit 1911i and CCB02-100BT BaseUSAFCC Part 15 Subpart CThis device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference.2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Caution: Any changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Honeywell may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.Use only shielded data cables with this system. This unit has been tested with cables less than 3 meters. Cables greater than 3 meters may not meet class B performance.TÜV-R StatementTÜV R listed: UL 60950-1, Second Edition and CSA C22.2 No.60950-1-07, Second Edition.CanadaIndustry CanadaThis device complies with Canadian RSS-210.  Operation is subject to the following conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.Conformité à la règlementation canadienneCet appareil ISM est conforme à la norme CNR-210 du Canada.  Son fonc-tionnement est assujetti aux conditions suivantes :1. Cet appareil ne doit pas causer de brouillage préjudiciable.2. Cet appareil doit pouvoir accepter tout brouillage reçu, y compris le brouillage pouvant causer un fonctionnement indésirable.TÜV RheinlandCUS
TÜV-R StatementTÜV R listed: UL 60950-1, Second Edition and CSA C22.2 No.60950-1-07, Second Edition.EuropeThe CE marking on the product indicates that this device is in confor-mity with all essential requirements of the 1999/5/EC R&TTE Directive and 2011/65/EU RoHS directive.  In addition, complies to 2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive, when shipped with recommended power supply.  European contact:Hand Held Products Europe B.V.Nijverheidsweg 9-135627 BT EindhovenThe NetherlandsHoneywell shall not be liable for use of our product with equipment (i.e., power supplies, personal computers, etc.) that is not CE marked and does not comply with the Low Voltage Directive.  This equipment is intended for use throughout the European Community and has been assessed to the following standards:EN 300 328EN 301 489-1 EN 301 489-17 EN60950-1Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment InformationHoneywell complies with Directive 2002/96/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PAR-LIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE).This product has required the extraction and use of natural resources for its production. It may contain hazardous substances that could impact health and the environment, if not properly disposed.In order to avoid the dissemination of those substances in our environment and to diminish the pressure on the natural resources, we encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems for product disposal. Those sys-tems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of the product you are dis-posing in a sound way.The crossed out wheeled bin symbol informs you that the product should not be disposed of along with municipal waste and invites you to use the appropriate separate take-back systems for product disposal.TÜV RheinlandCUS
If you need more information on the collection, reuse, and recycling sys-tems, contact your local or regional waste administration.You may also contact your supplier for more information on the environ-mental performances of this product.Australia/NZC-Tick StatementConforms to AS/NZS 3548 EMC requirements.ChinaSRRC Radio Certificate.China Safety applies only to the CCB02-100BT. RussiaGost-R certificate.InternationalLED Safety StatementScanner LEDs have been tested and classified as “EXEMPT RISK GROUP” to the standard: IEC 62471:2006.Radio TechnologyClass ICB SchemeCertified to CB Scheme IEC 60950-1, Second Edition.
Laser Safety StatementIf the following label is attached to your product, it indicates the product contains a laser engine or laser aimer:This device has been tested in accordance with and complies with IEC60825-1 ed2 (2007).  Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.LASER LIGHT, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM, CLASS 2 LASER PROD-UCT,  1.0 mW MAX OUTPUT: 650nM. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.Solids and Water ProtectionThe Granit 1911i has a rating of IP65, immunity of foreign particles and dripping water. PatentsFor patent information, please refer to www.honeywellaidc.com/patents.WarningTo reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries, avoid touching sections of the scanner that feel warm.LASER LIGHT. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM. CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT. 1.0MW MAX OUTPUT: 650NM. IEC 60825-1 Ed 2 (2007). Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.!
 Required Safety LabelsXenon 1900/1910/1902/1912 ScannerCompliance Label locationPart Number, Serial Number and Revision InformationlocationIllumination output
CCB01-010BT BasePart Number,SerialNumber and Revision Information locationCompliance Label locations
Granit 1910i/1911i ScannerLaser Label locationIllumination outputPart Number, Serial Number and Revision Information locationCompliance label location
CCB02-100BT BaseCompliance Label locations
iChapter 1 - Getting StartedAbout This Manual ...................................................... 1-1Unpacking Your Device............................................... 1-1Connecting the Device ................................................ 1-2Connecting with USB ............................................ 1-2Connecting with Keyboard Wedge........................ 1-4Connecting with RS232 Serial Port....................... 1-7Connecting with RS485....................................... 1-10Mounting a CCB01-010BT Charge Base .................. 1-11Mounting a CCB02-100BT Base............................... 1-11Reading Techniques ................................................. 1-14Menu Bar Code Security Settings ............................. 1-15Setting Custom Defaults ........................................... 1-15Resetting the Custom Defaults ................................. 1-16Resetting the Factory Defaults.................................. 1-16Chapter 2 - Programming the InterfaceIntroduction ................................................................. 2-1Programming the Interface - Plug and Play ................ 2-1Keyboard Wedge ........................................................ 2-1Laptop Direct Connect ................................................ 2-1RS232 Serial Port ....................................................... 2-2RS485 ......................................................................... 2-2RS485 Packet Mode ............................................. 2-3USB IBM SurePos....................................................... 2-4USB PC or Macintosh Keyboard................................. 2-4USB HID...................................................................... 2-5USB Serial................................................................... 2-5CTS/RTS Emulation.............................................. 2-5ACK/NAK Mode..................................................... 2-5Remote MasterMind™ for USB................................... 2-6Verifone® Ruby Terminal Default Settings.................. 2-6Gilbarco® Terminal Default Settings ........................... 2-7Honeywell Bioptic Aux Port Configuration................... 2-7Table of Contents
iiDatalogic™ Magellan® Aux Port Configuration ...........2-7NCR Bioptic Aux Port Configuration............................2-8Wincor Nixdorf Terminal Default Settings....................2-8Wincor Nixdorf Beetle™ Terminal Default Settings.....2-8Keyboard Country Layout............................................2-9Keyboard Style ..........................................................2-19Keyboard Conversion ................................................2-21Control Character Output...........................................2-21Keyboard Modifiers....................................................2-22RS232 Modifiers ........................................................2-23RS232 Baud Rate................................................2-23RS232 Word Length: Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity .......................................................2-25RS232 Receiver Time-Out...................................2-26RS232 Handshaking............................................2-27RS232 Timeout....................................................2-28XON/XOFF ..........................................................2-28ACK/NAK .............................................................2-28Scanner to Bioptic Communication............................2-29Scanner-Bioptic Packet Mode .............................2-29Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Mode.........................2-30Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Timeout.....................2-30Chapter 3 - Cordless System OperationHow the Cordless Charge Base/Access Point Works ..................................................3-1Linking the Scanner to a Charge Base........................3-1Linking the Scanner to an Access Point ......................3-2Communication Between the Cordless System and the Host..............................................................3-2Programming the Scanner and Base or Access Point ..........................................................................3-3RF (Radio Frequency) Module Operation....................3-3System Conditions.......................................................3-4Linking Process .....................................................3-4Scanner Is Out of Range .......................................3-4
iiiScanner Is Moved Back Into Range...................... 3-4Out of Range and Back into Range with Batch Mode On......................................... 3-4Page Button ................................................................ 3-5About the Battery ........................................................ 3-5Charging Information............................................. 3-5Battery Recommendations.................................... 3-5Proper Disposal of the Battery .............................. 3-6Beeper and LED Sequences and Meaning................. 3-7Scanner LED Sequences and Meaning ................ 3-8Base/Access Point LED Sequences and Meaning ........................................................... 3-8Base Power Communication Indicator .................. 3-9Reset Scanner ............................................................ 3-9Scanning While in Base Cradle................................... 3-9Paging ....................................................................... 3-10Paging Mode ....................................................... 3-10Paging Pitch ........................................................ 3-11Error Indicators.......................................................... 3-11Beeper Pitch - Base Error ................................... 3-11Number of Beeps - Base Error............................ 3-11Scanner Report ......................................................... 3-12Scanner Address....................................................... 3-12Base or Access Point Address.................................. 3-12Scanner Modes ......................................................... 3-13Charge Only Mode .............................................. 3-13Linked Modes...................................................... 3-13Unlinking the Scanner ............................................... 3-14Override Locked Scanner.................................... 3-15Out-of-Range Alarm .................................................. 3-15Alarm Sound Type............................................... 3-15Scanner Power Time-Out Timer ............................... 3-16Flexible Power Management..................................... 3-18Batch Mode ............................................................... 3-19Batch Mode Beep................................................ 3-20Batch Mode Storage............................................ 3-20Batch Mode Quantity........................................... 3-21
ivBatch Mode Output Order....................................3-23Total Records ......................................................3-24Delete Last Code .................................................3-24Clear All Codes....................................................3-24Transmit Records to Host ....................................3-24Batch Mode Transmit Delay ................................3-25Multiple Scanner Operation .......................................3-25Scanner Name...........................................................3-26Application Work Groups...........................................3-27Application Work Group Selection .......................3-28Resetting the Factory Defaults: All Application Work Groups....................................3-29Resetting the Custom Defaults: All Application Work Groups....................................3-30Using the Scanner with Bluetooth Devices................3-30Bluetooth HID Keyboard Connect........................3-30Bluetooth HID Keyboard Disconnect ...................3-32Bluetooth Serial Port - PCs/Laptops ....................3-32PDAs/Mobility Systems Devices..........................3-33Changing the Scanner’s Bluetooth PIN Code......3-33Minimizing Bluetooth/ISM Band Network Activity ......3-33Auto Reconnect Mode .........................................3-34Maximum Link Attempts ......................................3-35Relink Time-Out...................................................3-36Bluetooth/ISM Network Activity Examples...........3-36Host Acknowledgment...............................................3-37Chapter 4 - Input/Output SettingsPower Up Beeper ........................................................4-1Beep on BEL Character...............................................4-2Trigger Click.................................................................4-2Good Read and Error Indicators..................................4-2Beeper – Good Read.............................................4-2Beeper Volume – Good Read................................4-3Beeper Pitch – Good Read....................................4-3Vibrate – Good Read .............................................4-4
vBeeper Pitch – Error.............................................. 4-5Beeper Duration – Good Read.............................. 4-5LED – Good Read................................................. 4-5Number of Beeps – Good Read............................ 4-6Number of Beeps – Error ...................................... 4-6Beeper Volume Max.............................................. 4-6Good Read Delay.................................................. 4-7User-Specified Good Read Delay ......................... 4-7Manual Trigger Modes ................................................ 4-7LED Illumination - Manual Trigger......................... 4-8Serial Trigger Mode..................................................... 4-9Read Time-Out...................................................... 4-9Presentation Mode ...................................................... 4-9LED Illumination - Presentation Mode................. 4-10Presentation LED Behavior after Decode ........... 4-10Presentation Sensitivity....................................... 4-11Presentation Centering........................................ 4-11In-Stand Sensor Mode .............................................. 4-14CodeGate®................................................................ 4-14Streaming Presentation™ Mode ............................... 4-15Streaming Presentation In-Stand Programming.. 4-15Mobile Phone Read Mode......................................... 4-16Hands Free Time-Out ............................................... 4-16Reread Delay ............................................................ 4-16User-Specified Reread Delay.................................... 4-17Illumination Lights ..................................................... 4-18Aimer Delay............................................................... 4-18User-Specified Aimer Delay ................................ 4-18Scanner Time-Out..................................................... 4-19Aimer Mode............................................................... 4-19Centering................................................................... 4-19Preferred Symbology ................................................ 4-21High Priority Symbology...................................... 4-22Low Priority Symbology....................................... 4-22Preferred Symbology Time-out ........................... 4-22Preferred Symbology Default .............................. 4-23Output Sequence Overview ...................................... 4-23
viRequire Output Sequence ...................................4-23Output Sequence Editor ......................................4-23To Add an Output Sequence ...............................4-24Other Programming Selections............................4-24Output Sequence Editor ......................................4-26Partial Sequence .................................................4-26Require Output Sequence ...................................4-27Multiple Symbols........................................................4-27No Read.....................................................................4-28Video Reverse ...........................................................4-28Working Orientation...................................................4-29Chapter 5 - Data EditingPrefix/Suffix Overview..................................................5-1To Add a Prefix or Suffix:.......................................5-1To Clear One or All Prefixes or Suffixes ................5-2To Add a Carriage Return Suffix to All Symbologies............................................5-3Prefix Selections..........................................................5-3Suffix Selections ..........................................................5-3Function Code Transmit ..............................................5-4Intercharacter, Interfunction, and Intermessage Delays..........................................5-4Intercharacter Delay ..............................................5-5User Specified Intercharacter Delay ......................5-5Interfunction Delay.................................................5-6Intermessage Delay...............................................5-6Chapter 6 - Data FormattingData Format Editor Introduction...................................6-1Add a Data Format ......................................................6-1Other Programming Selections..............................6-3Terminal ID Table ........................................................6-4Data Format Editor Commands...................................6-4Move Commands...................................................6-9Search Commands ..............................................6-10
viiMiscellaneous Commands .................................. 6-13Data Formatter .......................................................... 6-16Data Format Non-Match Error Tone.................... 6-17Primary/Alternate Data Formats................................ 6-18Single Scan Data Format Change....................... 6-18Chapter 7 - SymbologiesAll Symbologies........................................................... 7-2Message Length Description....................................... 7-2Codabar ...................................................................... 7-3Codabar Concatenation ........................................ 7-4Code 39....................................................................... 7-6Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)........................ 7-8Full ASCII .............................................................. 7-9Code 39 Code Page.............................................. 7-9Interleaved 2 of 5 ...................................................... 7-10NEC 2 of 5................................................................. 7-12Code 93..................................................................... 7-14Code 93 Code Page............................................ 7-15Straight 2 of 5 Industrial (three-bar start/stop) .......... 7-16Straight 2 of 5 IATA (two-bar start/stop).................... 7-17Matrix 2 of 5 .............................................................. 7-18Code 11..................................................................... 7-19Code 128................................................................... 7-20ISBT 128 Concatenation ..................................... 7-20Code 128 Code Page.......................................... 7-22GS1-128.................................................................... 7-23Telepen ..................................................................... 7-24UPC-A ....................................................................... 7-25UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code .................................. 7-27Coupon GS1 DataBar Output ................................... 7-28UPC-E0 ..................................................................... 7-29UPC-E1 ..................................................................... 7-31EAN/JAN-13.............................................................. 7-32Convert UPC-A to EAN-13.................................. 7-32
viiiISBN Translate ....................................................7-34EAN/JAN-8 ................................................................7-35MSI ............................................................................7-37GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional ...................................7-39GS1 DataBar Limited.................................................7-39GS1 DataBar Expanded ............................................7-40Trioptic Code .............................................................7-41Codablock A ..............................................................7-41Codablock F...............................................................7-43PDF417......................................................................7-44MacroPDF417............................................................7-45MicroPDF417.............................................................7-45GS1 Composite Codes..............................................7-46UPC/EAN Version................................................7-46GS1 Emulation...........................................................7-47TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39) ..................................7-48QR Code....................................................................7-49QR Code Page ....................................................7-50Data Matrix ................................................................7-51Data Matrix Code Page .......................................7-52MaxiCode...................................................................7-53Aztec Code ................................................................7-54Aztec Code Page.................................................7-55Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) Code.............................7-56Postal Codes - 2D......................................................7-57Single 2D Postal Codes:......................................7-57Combination 2D Postal Codes:............................7-58Postal Codes - Linear ................................................7-61China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)............................7-61Korea Post ...........................................................7-63Chapter 8 - Imaging CommandsSingle-Use Basis .........................................................8-1Command Syntax ........................................................8-1Image Snap - IMGSNP................................................8-2IMGSNP Modifiers .................................................8-2
ixImage Ship - IMGSHP................................................. 8-5IMGSHP Modifiers................................................. 8-5Intelligent Signature Capture - IMGBOX ................... 8-14Signature Capture Optimize................................ 8-14IMGBOX Modifiers .............................................. 8-15RF Default Imaging Device ....................................... 8-19Chapter 9 - Interface KeysKeyboard Function Relationships ............................... 9-1Supported Interface Keys............................................ 9-3Chapter 10 - UtilitiesTo Add a Test Code I.D. Prefix to All Symbologies ........................................................... 10-1Show Decoder Revision............................................ 10-1Show Scan Driver Revision....................................... 10-1Show Software Revision ........................................... 10-1Show Data Format .................................................... 10-2Test Menu ................................................................. 10-2TotalFreedom............................................................ 10-2Application Plug-Ins (Apps)....................................... 10-3EZConfig-Scanning Introduction ............................... 10-3Installing EZConfig-Scanning from the Web ....... 10-4Chapter 11 - Serial Programming CommandsConventions .............................................................. 11-1Menu Command Syntax............................................ 11-1Query Commands ..................................................... 11-2Responses .......................................................... 11-3Trigger Commands ................................................... 11-4Resetting the Custom Defaults ................................. 11-4Menu Commands...................................................... 11-5
xChapter 12 - Product SpecificationsXenon 1900/1910 Corded Scanner Product Specifications ..........................................................12-1Xenon 1902/1912 Cordless Scanner Product Specifications ..........................................................12-2Granit 1910i Industrial Corded Scanner Product Specifications ..........................................................12-3Granit 1911i Industrial Cordless Scanner Product Specifications ..........................................................12-4CCB01-010BT Charge Base Product Specifications ..........................................................12-6CCB02-100BT Industrial Charge Base Product Specifications ..........................................................12-7Depth of Field Charts.................................................12-8Xenon B&W Scanner Typical Performance.........12-8 Xenon B&W Scanner Guaranteed Performance...................................................12-9 Xenon Color Scanner (Model COL) Typical Performance.................................................12-10Xenon Color Scanner (Model COL) Guaranteed Performance ............................12-11Granit Scanner Typical Performance ................12-11 Granit Scanner Guaranteed Performance ........12-12Standard Connector Pinouts....................................12-13Keyboard Wedge ...............................................12-13Serial Output......................................................12-13RS485 Output ....................................................12-14USB ...................................................................12-14Chapter 13 - MaintenanceRepairs ......................................................................13-1Maintenance ..............................................................13-1Cleaning the Scanner ..........................................13-1Cleaning the Window...........................................13-1Health Care Housing ...........................................13-1Inspecting Cords and Connectors .......................13-2
xiReplacing Cables in Corded Scanners ..................... 13-2Replacing a Xenon Interface Cable..................... 13-3Replacing a Granit Interface Cable ..................... 13-3Replacing Cables and Batteries in Cordless Systems ............................................... 13-4Replacing an Interface Cable in a Base.............. 13-4Changing a Xenon Scanner Battery.................... 13-5Changing a Granit Scanner Battery .................... 13-5Troubleshooting a Corded Scanner .......................... 13-5Troubleshooting a Cordless System ......................... 13-6Troubleshooting a Base ...................................... 13-6Troubleshooting a Cordless Scanner.................. 13-7Chapter 14 - Customer SupportTechnical Assistance ................................................ 14-1Appendix A - Reference ChartsSymbology Charts.......................................................A-1Linear Symbologies...............................................A-12D Symbologies ....................................................A-3Postal Symbologies...............................................A-3ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252) ...............A-4Lower ASCII Reference Table ....................................A-5ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements ............A-10Unicode Key Maps ....................................................A-13
xii
1 - 11Getting StartedAbout This ManualThis User’s Guide provides installation and programming instructions for the Xenon™ 1900 and 1910 corded area-imaging scanners, the Xenon 1902 and 1912 cordless area-imaging scanners, and the Granit 1910i corded and 1911i cordless industrial scanners.  Product specifications, dimensions, warranty, and customer support information are also included.Honeywell bar code scanners are factory programmed for the most common terminal and communications settings.  If you need to change these settings, programming is accomplished by scanning the bar codes in this guide.An asterisk (*) next to an option indicates the default setting.Unpacking Your DeviceAfter you open the shipping carton containing the product, take the following steps:• Check for damage during shipment.  Report damage immediately to the carrier who delivered the carton.• Make sure the items in the carton match your order.• Save the shipping container for later storage or shipping.
1 - 2Connecting the DeviceConnecting with USBA scanner or a cordless base can be connected to the USB port of a com-puter. 1. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the device first, then to the computer.Corded Xenon Scanner USB Connection:Corded Granit Scanner USB Connection:
1 - 32. If you are connecting a Granit scanner, make sure the cable is pushed tightly into the scanner.  Loosen the locking plate and slide it over the base of the cable connector to lock the cable in place.  Tighten the screw.Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.3. If you are connecting a CCB01-010BT Base, make sure the cables are secured in the wireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the CCB01-010BT Base USB Connection:CCB02-100BT Base USB Connection:
1 - 4base sits flat on a horizontal surface.  If you are connecting a CCB02-100BT Base, see Mounting a CCB02-100BT Base on page 1-11.4. The scanner beeps.5. Verify the scanner or cordless base operation by scanning a bar code from the Sample Symbols in the back of this manual.The unit defaults to a USB PC Keyboard.  Refer to page 2-4 for other USB terminal settings.For additional USB programming and technical information, refer to “USB Application Note,” available at www.honeywellaidc.com.Connecting with Keyboard WedgeA scanner or cordless base can be connected between the keyboard and PC as a “keyboard wedge,” where the scanner provides data output that is similar to keyboard entries.  The following is an example of a keyboard wedge connection:1. Turn off power and disconnect the keyboard cable from the back of the terminal/computer.2. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the device and to the terminal/computer.Corded Xenon Scanner Keyboard Wedge Connection:
1 - 53. If you are connecting a Granit scanner, make sure the cable is pushed tightly into the scanner.  Loosen the locking plate and slide it over the base of the cable connector to lock the cable in place.  Tighten the screw.Corded Granit Scanner Keyboard Wedge Connection:CCB01-010BT Base Keyboard Wedge Connection:
1 - 6Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.4. If you are connecting a CCB01-010BT Base, make sure the cables are secured in the wireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the base sits flat on a horizontal surface.  If you are connecting a CCB02-100BT Base, see Mounting a CCB02-100BT Base on page 1-11.5. Turn the terminal/computer power back on.  The scanner beeps.6. Verify the scanner or cordless base operation by scanning a bar code from the Sample Symbols in the back of this manual.  The scanner beeps once. If using a Granit scanner, it also vibrates. The unit defaults to an IBM PC AT and compatibles keyboard wedge inter-face with a USA keyboard.  A carriage return (CR) suffix is added to bar code data. CCB02-100BT Base Keyboard Wedge Connection:
1 - 7Connecting with RS232 Serial Port1. Turn off power to the terminal/computer.2. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the scanner.Note: For the scanner or cordless base to work properly, you must have the correct cable for your type of terminal/computer.Corded Xenon Scanner RS232 Serial Port Connection:
1 - 83. If you are connecting a Granit scanner, make sure the cable is pushed tightly into the scanner.  Loosen the locking plate and slide it over the base of the cable connector to lock the cable in place.  Tighten the screw.Corded Granit Scanner RS232 Serial Port Connection:CCB01-010BT Base RS232 Serial Port  Connection:
1 - 9Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.4. If you are connecting a CCB01-010BT Base, make sure the cables are secured in the wireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the base sits flat on a horizontal surface.  If you are connecting a CCB02-100BT Base, see Mounting a CCB02-100BT Base on page 1-11.5. Plug the serial connector into the serial port on your computer.  Tighten the two screws to secure the connector to the port.6. Once the scanner or cordless base has been fully connected, power up the computer.This interface programs 115,200 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.   CCB02-100BT Base RS232 Serial Port  Connection:
1 - 10Connecting with RS485A Xenon scanner or cordless base can be connected for an IBM POS ter-minal interface.  (This interface is not available in the Granit devices.)1. Connect the appropriate interface cable to the device, then to the com-puter.Note: The power supply must be ordered separately, if needed.Corded Xenon Scanner RS485 Connection:CCB01-010BT Base RS485 Connection:
1 - 112. Make sure the cables are secured in the wireways in the bottom of the cordless base and the base sits flat on a horizontal surface.3. Turn the terminal/computer power back on.  The scanner beeps.4. Verify the scanner or cordless base operation by scanning a bar code from the Sample Symbols in the back of this manual.  The scanner beeps once.  If using a Granit scanner, it also vibrates.For further RS485 settings, refer to RS485, page 2-2.Mounting a CCB01-010BT Charge BaseMounting a CCB02-100BT BaseThe CCB02-100BT Base can be mounted on either a horizontal or vertical sur-face.  The cables can be routed through either the top or the bottom of the base. The cables can be routed down through the bottom of the base, securing the cables in the wireways.8x32 thread x .39 in. (10mm) deep2.36 in.59.84mm3.35 in.85.09mm2.8 in.72.1mm
1 - 12The cables can also be routed up through the top of the base, crossing them over and securing the cables in the wireways.  When routing the cables up through the top of the base, be sure to cross the cables over before placing in the wireways.  If not, too much strain is placed on the cable connectors.When mounted on a vertical surface, a locking system is used to secure the scanner when it is in the stand.  When mounted on a horizontal surface, the locking mechanism should be set to unlocked (pushed up).  When mounted on a vertical surface, the locking mechanism should be set to locked (pushed down).Locked position for vertical mount Unlocked position for horizontal mount
1 - 13Use 30mm screws, appropriate for the mounting surface material, to mount the base securely. 2 in.51.17mm5.31 in.134.92mm2.51 in.63.7mm2.36 in.60mm.84 in.21.42mm
1 - 14Reading TechniquesThe Xenon 1900/1902 scanners have a view finder that projects a bright red aiming beam that corresponds to the scanner’s horizontal field of view.  The Xenon 1910/1912 and Granit 1910i/1911i scanners have an aiming pattern .  The aiming beam or pattern should be centered over the bar code, but it can be positioned in any direction for a good read.Linear bar codes with aiming beam2D Matrix symbol with aiming beamLinear bar codes with aiming pattern2D Matrix symbol with aiming pattern
1 - 15The aiming beam or pattern is smaller when the scanner is closer to the code and larger when it is farther from the code.  Symbologies with smaller bars or elements (mil size) should be read closer to the unit.  Symbologies with larger bars or elements (mil size) should be read farther from the unit.   To read single or multiple symbols (on a page or on an object), hold the scanner at an appro-priate distance from the target, pull the trigger, and center the aiming beam or pattern on the symbol.  If the code being scanned is highly reflective (e.g., lami-nated), it may be necessary to tilt the code up 15° to 18° to prevent unwanted reflection.Menu Bar Code Security SettingsHoneywell scanners are programmed by scanning menu bar codes or by send-ing serial commands to the scanner.  If you want to restrict the ability to scan menu codes, you can use the Menu Bar Code Security settings.  Please contact the nearest technical support office (see Technical Assistance on page 14-1) for further information.Setting Custom DefaultsYou have the ability to create a set of menu commands as your own, custom defaults.  To do so, scan the Set Custom Defaults bar code below before scan-ning the menu commands for your custom defaults.  If a menu command requires scanning numeric codes from the back cover, then a Save code, that entire sequence will be saved to your custom defaults.  When you have entered all the commands you want to save for your custom defaults, scan the Save Custom Defaults bar code.Note: When using a cordless system, the Custom Defaults settings apply to all workgroups.  Scanning the Save Defaults bar code also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked.  The scanner must be placed in its base to re-establish the link before any setup codes are entered.  If using an Access Point, the linking bar code must be scanned.  See Cordless System Operation beginning on page 3-1 for additional information.You may have a series of custom settings and want to correct a single setting.  To do so, just scan the new setting to overwrite the old one.  For example, if you had previously saved the setting for Beeper Volume at Low to your custom defaults, and decide you want the beeper volume set to High, just scan the Set Custom Defaults bar code, then scan the Beeper Volume High menu code, and then Save Custom Defaults.  The rest of the custom defaults will remain, but the beeper volume setting will be updated.Save Custom DefaultsSet Custom Defaults
1 - 16Resetting the Custom DefaultsIf you want the custom default settings restored to your scanner, scan the Acti-vate Custom Defaults bar code below.  This is the recommended default bar code for most users.  It resets the scanner to the custom default settings.  If there are no custom defaults, it will reset the scanner to the factory default set-tings.  Any settings that have not been specified through the custom defaults will be defaulted to the factory default settings.Note: If using a cordless system, scanning this bar code also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked.  The scanner must be placed in its base to re-establish the link.  If using an Access Point, the linking bar code must be scanned.  See Cordless System Operation beginning on page 3-1 for additional information.Resetting the Factory DefaultsIf you aren’t sure what programming options are in your scanner, or you’ve changed some options and want to restore the scanner to factory default set-tings, first scan the Remove Custom Defaults bar code, then scan Activate Defaults.  This resets the scanner to the factory default settings.Note: If using a cordless system, scanning the Activate Defaults bar code also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked.  The scanner must be placed in its base to re-establish the link before any setup codes are entered.  If using an Access Point, the linking bar code must be scanned.  See Cordless System Operation beginning on page 3-1 for additional information.The Menu Commands, beginning on page 11-5 list the factory default settings for each of the commands (indicated by an asterisk (*) on the programming pages).This selection erases all your settings and resets the scanner to the original factory defaults.  It also disables all plugins.Activate Custom Defaults!Remove Custom DefaultsActivate Defaults
2 - 12Programming the InterfaceIntroductionThis chapter describes how to program your system for the desired interface.Programming the Interface - Plug and PlayPlug and Play bar codes provide instant scanner set up for commonly used interfaces.Note: After you scan one of the codes, power cycle the host terminal to have the interface in effect.Keyboard WedgeIf you want your system programmed for an IBM PC AT and compatibles key-board wedge interface with a USA keyboard, scan the bar code below.  Key-board wedge is the default interface.Note: The following bar code also programs a carriage return (CR) suffix.Laptop Direct ConnectFor most laptops, scanning the Laptop Direct Connect bar code allows opera-tion of the scanner in parallel with the integral keyboard.  The following Laptop Direct Connect bar code also programs a carriage return (CR) suffix and turns on Emulate External Keyboard (page 2-20).IBM PC AT and Compatibles with CR suffixLaptop Direct Connectwith CR suffix
2 - 2RS232 Serial PortThe RS232 Interface bar code is used when connecting to the serial port of a PC or terminal.  The following RS232 Interface bar code also programs a car-riage return (CR) and a line feed (LF) suffix, baud rate, and data format as indi-cated below.  It also changes the trigger mode to manual.RS485Scan one of the following “Plug and Play” codes to program the scanner for an IBM POS terminal interface.Note: This interface is not supported in Granit devices.After scanning one of these codes, you must power cycle the cash register.Option SettingBaud Rate 115,200 bpsData Format 8 data bits, no parity bit, 1 stop bitRS232 InterfaceIBM Port 5B InterfaceIBM Port 9B HHBCR-1 InterfaceIBM Port 17 InterfaceIBM Port 9BHHBCR-2 Interface
2 - 3Each bar code above also programs the following suffixes for each symbology:* Suffixes programmed for Code 128 with IBM 4683 Port 5B, IBM 4683 Port 9B HHBCR-1, and IBM 4683 Port 17 Interfaces**Suffixes programmed for Code 128 with IBM 4683 Port 9 HHBCR-2 InterfaceRS485 Packet ModeThe following selection allows you to break up large bar code data into smaller packets on an IBM POS terminal.  To break up large bar codes into small packets, scan the Packet Mode On bar code below.  Scan the Packet Mode Off bar code if you want large bar code data to be sent to the host in a single chunk.  Default = Packet Mode Off.RS485 Packet LengthIf you are using Packet mode, you can specify the size of the data “packet” that is sent to the host.  Scan the Packet Length bar code, then then the packet size (from 20 - 256) from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual, then Save.  Default = 40.Symbology Suffix Symbology SuffixEAN 8 0C Code 39 00  0A  0BEAN 13 16 Interleaved 2 of 5 00  0D  0BUPC A 0D Code 128 * 00  0A  0BUPC E 0A Code 128 ** 00  18  0BMaxiCode 00  2F  0BPacket Mode On* Packet Mode OffPacket Length
2 - 4USB IBM SurePosScan one of the following “Plug and Play” codes to program the scanner for an IBM SurePos (USB handheld scanner) or IBM SurePos (USB tabletop scanner) interface.Note: After scanning one of these codes, you must power cycle the cash register.Each bar code above also programs the following suffixes for each symbology:USB PC or Macintosh KeyboardScan one of the following codes to program the scanner for USB PC Keyboard or USB Macintosh Keyboard.  Scanning these codes also adds a CR suffix.Symbology Suffix Symbology SuffixEAN 8 0C Code 39 00  0A  0BEAN 13 16 Interleaved 2 of 5 00  0D  0BUPC A 0D Code 128 00  18  0BUPC E 0A Code 39 00  0A  0BUSB IBM SurePos (USB Handheld Scanner) InterfaceUSB IBM SurePos (USB Tabletop Scanner) InterfaceUSB Keyboard (PC)USB Keyboard (Mac)USB Japanese Keyboard (PC)
2 - 5USB HIDScan the following code to program the scanner for USB HID bar code scan-ners.USB SerialScan the following code to program the scanner to emulate a regular RS232-based COM Port.  If you are using a Microsoft® Windows® PC, you will need to download a driver from the Honeywell website (www.honeywellaidc.com).  The driver will use the next available COM Port number.  Apple® Macintosh comput-ers recognize the scanner as a USB CDC class device and automatically use a class driver.  Note: No extra configuration (e.g., baud rate) is necessary.CTS/RTS EmulationACK/NAK ModeUSB HID Bar Code ScannerUSB SerialCTS/RTS Emulation On* CTS/RTS Emulation OffACK/NAK Mode On* ACK/NAK Mode Off
2 - 6Remote MasterMind™ for USBWhen using a USB interface, you may wish to configure your scanner to com-municate with Remote MasterMind Scanner Management Software (ReM).  Scan the ReM On bar code to communicate with ReM.  To disable this capabil-ity, scan ReM Off.  Verifone® Ruby Terminal Default SettingsScan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Verifone Ruby terminal.  This bar code sets the baud rate to 1200 bps and the data for-mat to 8 data bits, no parity bit, 1 stop bit.  It also adds a line feed (LF) suffix and programs the following prefixes for each symbology:Symbology PrefixUPC-A AUPC-E AEAN-8 FFEAN-13 FReM OffReM OnVerifone Ruby Settings
2 - 7Gilbarco® Terminal Default SettingsScan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Gilbarco terminal.  This bar code sets the baud rate to 2400 bps and the data format to 7 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits.  It also adds a carriage return (CR) suffix and programs the following prefixes for each symbology:Honeywell Bioptic Aux Port ConfigurationScan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Honeywell bioptic scanner auxiliary port configuration.  This bar code sets the baud rate to 38400 bps and the data format to 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.  Datalogic™ Magellan® Aux Port ConfigurationScan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Datalogic Magellan auxiliary port configuration.  This bar code sets the baud rate to 9600 bps and the data format to 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.  Symbology PrefixUPC-A AUPC-E E0EAN-8 FFEAN-13 FGilbarco SettingsHoneywell Bioptic SettingsDatalogic Magellan Settings
2 - 8NCR Bioptic Aux Port ConfigurationScan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for an NCR biop-tic scanner auxiliary port configuration.  The following prefixes are programmed for each symbology:Wincor Nixdorf Terminal Default SettingsScan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Wincor Nix-dorf terminal.  This bar code sets the baud rate to 9600 bps and the data format to 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.  Wincor Nixdorf Beetle™ Terminal Default SettingsScan the following Plug and Play code to program the scanner for a Wincor Nix-dorf Beetle terminal.  The following prefixes are programmed for each symbol-ogy:Symbology Prefix Symbology PrefixUPC-A A Code 39 B1UPC-E E0 Interleaved 2 of 5 B2EAN-8 FF All other bar codesB3EAN-13 FSymbology Prefix Symbology PrefixCode 128 K EAN-13 ACode 93 L GS1-128 PCodabar N Interleaved 2 of 5 IUPC-A A0 Plessey OUPC-E C Straight  2 of 5 IATA HEAN-8 B All other bar codes MNCR Bioptic SettingsWincor Nixdorf Terminal Settings
2 - 9Keyboard Country LayoutScan the appropriate country code below to program the keyboard layout for your country or language. As a general rule, the following characters are sup-ported, but need special care for countries other than the United States:@  |  $  #  {  }  [  ]  =  /  ‘  \  <  >  ~  Keyboard CountriesWincor Nixdorf Beetle Settings* United States AlbaniaAzeri (Cyrillic)Azeri (Latin)BelarusBelgium
2 - 10Keyboard Countries (Continued)BosniaBrazilBrazil (MS)Bulgaria (Cyrillic)Bulgaria (Latin)Canada (French legacy)Canada (French)Canada (Multilingual)
2 - 11Keyboard Countries (Continued)CroatiaCzechCzech (Programmers)Czech (QWERTY)Czech (QWERTZ)DenmarkDutch (Netherlands)Estonia
2 - 12Keyboard Countries (Continued)FaroeseFinlandFranceGaelicGermanyGreekGreek (220 Latin)Greek (220)
2 - 13Keyboard Countries (Continued)Greek (319 Latin)Greek (319)Greek (Latin)Greek (MS)Greek (Polytonic)HebrewHungarian (101 key)HungaryIceland
2 - 14Keyboard Countries (Continued)IrishItalian (142)ItalyJapan ASCIIKazakhKyrgyz (Cyrillic)Latin AmericaLatvia
2 - 15Keyboard Countries (Continued)Latvia (QWERTY)LithuaniaLithuania (IBM)MacedoniaMaltaMongolian (Cyrillic)NorwayPoland
2 - 16Keyboard Countries (Continued)Polish (214)Polish (Programmers)PortugalRomaniaRussiaRussian (MS)Russian (Typewriter)SCS
2 - 17Keyboard Countries (Continued)Serbia (Cyrillic)Serbia (Latin)SlovakiaSlovakia (QWERTY)Slovakia (QWERTZ)SloveniaSpainSpanish variation
2 - 18Keyboard Countries (Continued)SwedenSwitzerland (French)Switzerland (German)TatarTurkey FTurkey QUkrainianUnited Kingdom
2 - 19Keyboard StyleThis programs keyboard styles, such as Caps Lock and Shift Lock.  If you have used Keyboard Conversion settings, they will override any of the following Key-board Style settings.  Default = Regular.Regular is used when you normally have the Caps Lock key off.Keyboard Countries (Continued)United States (Dvorak)United States (Dvorak left)United Stated (Dvorak right)United States (International)Uzbek (Cyrillic)* Regular
2 - 20Caps Lock is used when you normally have the Caps Lock key on.Shift Lock is used when you normally have the Shift Lock key on (not common to U.S. keyboards).Automatic Caps Lock is used if you change the Caps Lock key on and off.   The software tracks and reflects if you have Caps Lock on or off . This selection can only be used with systems that have an LED that notes the Caps Lock sta-tus (AT keyboards).Autocaps via NumLock bar code should be scanned in countries (e.g., Ger-many, France) where the Caps Lock key cannot be used to toggle Caps Lock.  The NumLock option works similarly to the regular Autocaps, but uses the Num-Lock key to retrieve the current state of the Caps Lock.Emulate External Keyboard should be scanned if you do not have an external keyboard (IBM AT or equivalent).  Note: After scanning the Emulate External Keyboard bar code, you must power cycle your computer.Caps Lock Shift LockAutomatic Caps Lock Autocaps via NumLock Emulate External Keyboard
2 - 21Keyboard ConversionAlphabetic keyboard characters can be forced to be all upper case or all lower-case.  So if you have the following bar code: “abc569GK,” you can make the out-put “ABC569GK” by scanning Convert All Characters to Upper Case, or to “abc569gk” by scanning Convert All Characters to Lower Case.  These settings override Keyboard Style selections.  Note: If your interface is a keyboard wedge, first scan the menu code for Automatic Caps Lock (page 2-20).  Otherwise, your output may not be as expected.  Default = Keyboard Conversion Off. Control Character OutputThis selection sends a text string instead of a control character.  For example, when the control character for a carriage return is expected, the output would display [CR] instead of the ASCII code of 0D.  Refer to ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252) on page A-4.  Only codes 00 through 1F are converted (the first column of the chart). Note: Control + X (Control + ASCII) Mode overrides this mode.  Default = Off.* Keyboard Conversion OffConvert All Characters to Upper CaseConvert All Characters to Lower CaseControl Character Output On* Control Character Output Off
2 - 22Keyboard ModifiersThis modifies special keyboard features, such as CTRL+ ASCII codes and Turbo Mode.Control + X (Control + ASCII) Mode On: The scanner sends key combina-tions for ASCII control characters for values 00-1F.  Windows is the preferred mode.  All keyboard country codes are supported.  DOS mode is a legacy mode, and it does not support all keyboard country codes.  New users should use the Windows mode.  Refer to Keyboard Function Relationships, page 9-1 for CTRL+ X Values. Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix Off:  The scanner sends key combinations for ASCII control characters for values 00-1F, but it does not transmit any prefix or suffix information. Default = Control + X Mode Off.Turbo Mode: The scanner sends characters to a terminal faster.  If the termi-nal drops characters, do not use Turbo Mode.   Default = OffWindows Mode Control + X Mode On * Control + X Mode Off DOS Mode Control + X Mode On Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix OffTurbo Mode On * Turbo Mode Off
2 - 23Numeric Keypad Mode: Sends numeric characters as if entered from a numeric keypad.  Default = OffAutomatic Direct Connect Mode: This selection can be used if you have an IBM AT style terminal and the system is dropping characters.  Default = OffRS232 ModifiersRS232 Baud RateBaud Rate sends the data from the scanner to the terminal at the specified rate.  The host terminal must be set for the same baud rate as the scanner.  Default = 115,200.Numeric Keypad Mode On * Numeric Keypad Mode Off Automatic Direct Connect Mode On * Automatic Direct Connect Mode Off  300600
2 - 241200 240048009600192003840057,600 * 115,200
2 - 25RS232 Word Length: Data Bits, Stop Bits, and ParityData Bits sets the word length at 7 or 8 bits of data per character.  If an application requires only ASCII Hex characters 0 through 7F decimal (text, digits, and punctuation), select 7 data bits.  For applications that require use of the full ASCII set, select 8 data bits per character.  Default = 8.Stop Bits sets the stop bits at 1 or 2.  Default = 1.Parity provides a means of checking character bit patterns for validity.Default = None.7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd 7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Even7 Data, 2 Stop Parity None7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Odd8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even
2 - 26RS232 Receiver Time-OutThe unit stays awake to receive data until the RS232 Receiver Time-Out expires.  A manual or serial trigger resets the time-out.  When an RS232 receiver is sleeping, a character may be sent to wake up the receiver and reset the time-out.  A transaction on the CTS line will also wake up the   * 8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Space7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Space8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Space7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Mark7 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Mark8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Mark
2 - 27receiver.  The receiver takes 300 milliseconds to completely come up.  Change the RS232 receiver time-out by scanning the bar code below, then scanning digits  from the inside back cover of this manual, then scanning Save. The range is 0 to 300 seconds.   Default = 0 seconds (no time-out - always on).RS232 HandshakingRS232 Handshaking allows control of data transmission from the scanner using software commands from the host device.    When RTS/CTS is turned Off, no data flow control is used.  Flow Control, No Timeout:  The scanner asserts RTS when it has data to send, and will wait indefinitely for CTS to be asserted by the host.Two-Direction Flow Control:  The scanner asserts RTS when it is OK for the host to transmit.  The host asserts CTS when it is OK for the device to transmit.Flow Control with Timeout:  The scanner asserts RTS when it has data to send and waits for a delay (see RS232 Timeout on page 2-28) for CTS to be asserted by the host.  If the delay time expires and CTS is not asserted, the device transmit buffer is cleared and scanning may resume.  Default = RTS/CTS Off.RS232 Receiver Time-Out  Flow Control, No Timeout* RTS/CTS OffTwo-Direction Flow Control    Flow Control with Timeout
2 - 28RS232 TimeoutWhen using Flow Control with Timeout, you must program the length of the delay you want to wait for CTS from the host.  Set the length (in millisec-onds) for a timeout by scanning the bar code below, then setting the time-out (from 1-5100 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the inside back cover, then scanning Save. XON/XOFFStandard ASCII control characters can be used to tell the scanner to start sending data (XON/XOFF On) or to stop sending data (XON/XOFF Off).  When the host sends the XOFF character (DC3, hex 13) to the scanner, data transmission stops.  To resume transmission, the host sends the XON character (DC1, hex 11).  Data transmission continues where it left off when XOFF was sent.  Default = XON/XOFF Off.ACK/NAKAfter transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK character (hex 06) or a NAK character (hex 15) response from the host. If ACK is received, the communications cycle is completed and the scanner looks for more bar codes.  If NAK is received, the last set of bar code data is retransmitted and RS232 Timeout * XON/XOFF OffXON/XOFF On
2 - 29the scanner waits for ACK/NAK again.  Turn on the ACK/NAK protocol by scanning the ACK/NAK On bar code below.  To turn off the protocol, scan ACK/NAK Off.  Default = ACK/NAK Off.Scanner to Bioptic CommunicationThe following settings are used to set up communication between Honeywell scanners and bioptic scanners.  Note: The scanner’s baud rate must be set to 38400 and the RS232 timeout must be set to 3000 in order to communicate with a bioptic scanner.  See RS232 Modifiers on page 2-23, and RS232 Timeout on page 2-28 for further information.Scanner-Bioptic Packet ModePacket Mode On must be scanned to set the scanner’s format so it is com-patible with a bioptic scanner.  Default = Packet Mode Off.ACK/NAK On * ACK/NAK Off* Packet Mode Off Packet Mode On
2 - 30Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK ModeBioptic ACK/Nak On must be scanned so the scanner will wait for an ACK or NAK from a bioptic scanner after each packet is sent.  The Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Timeout (below) controls how long the scanner will wait for a response.  Default = Bioptic ACK/NAK Off.Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK TimeoutThis allows you to set the length (in milliseconds) for a timeout for a bioptic scanner’s ACK/NAK response.  Scan the bar code below, then set the time-out (from 1-30,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the inside back cover, then scanning Save.   Default = 5100.* Bioptic ACK/NAK Off Bioptic ACK/NAK On ACK/NAK Timeout
3 - 13Cordless System OperationNote: This chapter applies only to cordless scanning systems.  It does not apply to corded scanners. How the Cordless Charge Base/Access Point WorksA cordless charge base or an Access Point provide the link between the cord-less scanner and the host system.  The base/Access Point contains an interface assembly and an RF communication module.  The RF communication module performs the data exchange between the cordless scanner and the interface assembly.  The control assembly coordinates the central interface activities including: transmitting/receiving commands and data to/from the host system, performing software activities (parameter menuing, visual indicator support, power-on diagnostics), and data translation required for the host system.The cordless charge base is also a scanner’s battery charger.  Refer to Charging Information, page 3-5, for additional information.Linking the Scanner to a Charge BaseTurn off power before connecting a base, then power up the computer once the base is fully connected.  When the base is connected and powered up, put the scanner in the base to establish a link.  The green LED on the base flashes to indicate the scanner’s battery is charging.If the scanner and base have previously been linked, you do not receive any feedback.  If this is the first time that the scanner and base are linked, both devices emit a short chirp when their radios link.  At this point, that one scanner is linked to one base. Xenon ScannerCCB01-010BT Charge Base Page Button and Base LEDsGranit ScannerCCB02-100BT Charge BasePage Button and Base LEDs
3 - 2To determine if your cordless system is set up correctly, scan one of the sample bar codes in the back of this manual.  If the scanner provides a single good read beep and the green LED lights, the scanner has successfully linked to the base.    If using a Granit scanner, the scanner also vibrates. If you receive an error tone and the red LED lights, the scanner has not linked to the base.  Refer to page 13-7 for troubleshooting information.Linking the Scanner to an Access PointTurn on the computer (laptop/desktop).  Plug the interface cable into the Access Point first and then into the appropriate port on the computer.  The Page button lights up when the connection to the host is made.Scan the linking bar code on the top of the Access Point to establish a connection between the Access Point and the scanner.  The scanner emits a short beep and flashes the green LED to confirm a connection with the Access Point.  The Access Point’s Page button remains blue.Communication Between the Cordless System and the HostThe cordless scanner provides immediate feedback in the form of a “good read” indication with a green LED on the scanner and an audible beep.  If using a Granit scanner, the scanner also vibrates.   This indicates that the bar code has been scanned correctly and the base or Access Point has acknowledged receiving the data. This is possible since the cordless system provides two-way communication between the scanner and the base or Access Point.When data is scanned, the data is sent to the host system via the base or Access Point.  The cordless scanner recognizes data acknowledgement (ACK) from the base or Access Point.  If it cannot be determined that the data has Page Button
3 - 3been properly sent to the base or Access Point, the scanner issues an error indication.  You must then check to see if the scanned data was received by the host system.1. Scanner reads code and gets ACK from base or Access Point2. Base or Access Point sends data to hostProgramming the Scanner and Base or Access PointWhen using the scanner and charge base or Access Point together as a sys-tem, menu parameters and configuration settings are stored in the charge base or Access Point.  Therefore, when programming any menu configuration set-tings, the scanner must be linked to the intended charge base or Access Point.Note: This only applies when the scanner is linked to a charge base or Access Point.  If the scanner is in a non-base mode, configuration settings are stored in the scanner. RF (Radio Frequency) Module OperationThe cordless system uses a two-way Bluetooth® radio to transmit and receive data between the scanner and the base or Access Point.  Designed for point-to-point and multipoint-to-single point applications, the radio operates using a license free ISM band, which sends relatively small data packets at a fast data rate over a radio signal with randomly changing frequencies, makes the cord-less system highly responsive to a wide variety of data collection applications and resistant to noisy RF environments.  The CCB01-010BT (Bluetooth Class 21122
3 - 42) provides a communication range of 33 feet (10m) between the scanner and base or Access Point, depending on the environment.  The CCB02-100BT (Bluetooth Class 1) provides a communication range of 330 feet (100m) between the scanner and base or Access Point, depending on the environment.  See Flexible Power Management, page 3-18, for information about controlling this range.System ConditionsThe components of the cordless system interact in specific ways as you associ-ate a scanner to a base or Access Point, as you move a scanner out of range, bring a scanner back in range, or swap scanners between two cordless sys-tems.  The following information explains the cordless system operating condi-tions.Linking ProcessOnce a scanner is placed into a cordless charge base, the scanner’s bat-tery charge status is checked, and software automatically detects the scan-ner and links it to the base depending on the selected link mode.  Refer to Linking the Scanner to an Access Point, page 3-2, for information about linking to an Access Point.Scanner Is Out of RangeThe cordless scanner is in communication with its base or Access Point, even when it is not transmitting bar code data.  Whenever the scanner can’t communicate with the base or Access Point for a few seconds, it is out of range.  If the scanner is out of range and you scan a bar code, the scanner issues an error tone indicating no communication with the base or Access Point.  A cordless charge base can also sound an alarm.  Refer to Out-of-Range Alarm, page 3-15.Scanner Is Moved Back Into RangeThe scanner relinks if the scanner or the base or Access Point have been reset, or the scanner comes back into range.  If the scanner relinks, you will hear a single chirp when the relinking process (uploading of the parameter table) is complete.  Refer to Out-of-Range Alarm on page 3-15 for further information.Out of Range and Back into Range with Batch Mode OnThe scanner may store a number of symbols (approximately 500 U.P.C. symbols; others may vary) when it is out of range and then send them to the base or Access Point when back in range (see Batch Mode on page 3-19).
3 - 5You will not hear a communication error tone in this mode, but you will hear a short buzz when you pull the trigger if the radio communication is not working.  Once the radio connection is made, the scanner produces a series of beeps while the data is being transferred to the base or Access Point.Page ButtonWhen you press the Page button on the base or Access Point, the scan-ners associated with that base or Access Point will begin beeping (3 short and 1 long beep).  If you pull the trigger on a scanner that is beeping in response, or press the Page button on the base or Access Point a second time, all associated scanners will stop beeping.  See Paging on page 3-10 for further information about Page Button settings. About the BatteryThere is a danger of explosion if the batteries are incorrectly replaced.  Replace the batteries with only the same or equivalent type recom-mended by the manufacturer.  Dispose of used batteries according to the recycle program for batteries as directed by the governing agency for the country where the batteries are to be discarded.Power is supplied to the cordless scanner by a rechargeable battery that is inte-grated in the scanner handle.  Batteries are shipped approximately 30% to 60% charged.  The battery should be charged for a minimum of 4 hours before initial use to ensure optimal performance.Charging InformationThe battery is designed to charge while the scanner is positioned in the cordless base unit.  Refer to Base/Access Point LED Sequences and Meaning, page 3-8, for an interpretation of the Charge Status indicators.  Refer to Charge Only Mode (page 3-13) if you need to charge a scanner without linking it to the base.Place the scanner in the base that is connected to an appropriate power supply.  Use only a Listed Limited Power Source (LPS) or Class 2 type power supply with output rated 5 to 5.2Vdc, 1A.Note: If you are powering the base through the interface cable (for example, a USB cable) and not using an external power supply plugged into the aux port, the current available for charging is reduced and charge times are increased. Battery Recommendations• The battery is a lithium ion cell and can be used without a full charge, and can also be charged without fully discharging, without impacting the battery life.  There is no need to perform any charge/discharge conditioning on this type of battery.• Keep the base connected to power when the host is not in use.• Replace a defective battery immediately since it could damage the scanner.!
3 - 6• Although your battery can be recharged many times, it will eventually be depleted.  Replace it after the battery is unable to hold an adequate charge.• If you are not sure if the battery or charger is working properly, send it to Honeywell International Inc. or an authorized service center for inspection.  Refer to Customer Support on page 14-1 for additional information.Caution:Use only Honeywell Li-ion battery packs, model number BAT-SCN01, rated 3.7 Vdc, 7.4Whr in this device.  Use of any non-Honeywell battery may result in damage not covered by the warranty.Safety Precautions for Lithium Batteries• Do not place batteries in fire or heat the batteries.• Do not store batteries near fire or other high temperature locations.• Do not store or carry batteries together with metal objects.• Do not expose batteries to water or allow the batteries to get wet.• Do not connect (short) the positive and negative terminals, of the batteries, to each other with any metal object.• Do not pierce, strike or step on batteries or subject batteries to strong impacts or shocks.• Do not disassemble or modify batteries.     Caution: Danger of explosion if batteries are incorrectly replaced.  Dispose of used batteries according to the recycle program for batteries as directed by the governing agency for the country where the batteries are to be discarded.Proper Disposal of the BatteryWhen the battery has reached the end of its useful life, the battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler.  Do not incinerate the battery or dispose of the battery with general waste materials.  You may send the scanner’s battery to us. (postage paid).  The shipper is responsible for complying with all federal, state, and local laws and regulations related to the packing, labeling, manifesting, and ship-ping of spent batteries.  Contact the Product Service Department (page 14-1) for recycling or disposal information.  Since you may find that your cost of returning the batteries significant, it may be more cost effective to locate a local recycle/disposal company.!!
3 - 7Beeper and LED Sequences and MeaningThe scanner contains LEDs on the rear of the unit that indicate linking status, decoding state, and battery condition.  The base has LEDs on the top of the unit that indicate its power up, communication, and battery charge condition.  The red LED = error; green LED = success of any type.  Scanners and the CCB01-010BT base have audible indicators as well: 1 razz or error tone = error; 2 beeps = menu change; 1 beep = all other successes.The table below lists the indication and cause of the LED indication, beeps, and vibrations for the scanner.
3 - 8Scanner LED Sequences and MeaningBase/Access Point LED Sequences and MeaningThe base contains a red LED and the Access Point has a blue LED that indicate the status of the unit and verifies its communication with the host system.  The base also has a green LED that indicates scanner battery charge condition. LED IndicationBeeper IndicationVibrate Indication CauseNormal OperationRed Flash None None Battery lowGreen Flash 1 beep None Successful communication or linkingRed, blinking Razz or error toneNone Failed communicationMenu OperationGreen Flash 2 beeps 2 vibrations Successful menu changeRed, blinking Razz or error tone1 long vibrationUnsuccessful menu changeRed or Blue LED - Host CommunicationRed or Blue LED Communication ConditionOff USB suspendOn continuously Power on, system idleShort blinks in multiple pulses.  Occurs while transferring data to/from the RF module or the Host port.Receiving data
3 - 9Base Power Communication IndicatorTo display the power indicator on a base or an Access Point, scan the Base Power Communication Indicator On bar code.  To turn off the power indi-cator, scan the Off bar code.  Default = On.  Reset ScannerScanning this bar code reboots the scanner and causes it to relink with the base or Access Point.Scanning While in Base CradleNote: This feature only applies to the CCB01-010BT base.If you want to be able to scan bar codes while the scanner is in the base cradle, scan the Scanning in Cradle On bar code below.  If you want to only allow scanning when the scanner is out of the base cradle, scan Scanning in Cradle Green LED - Scanner Battery(base only, does not apply to Access Point)Green LED Charge ConditionOff Battery not detected or charge suspendedSlow flash, 1 second on, 1 second off Pre-charge and chargingOn continuously Charge completeFast flash, 300 mSec on, 300 mSec off Charge Error* Base Power Communication Indicator OnBase Power Communication Indicator OffReset Scanner
3 - 10Off.  If you want the scanner to shut down when in the base cradle, scan Shut Down Scanner in Cradle.  Default = Scanning in Cradle On (for CCB01-010BT).PagingPaging ModeBy default, the paging button on the base or Access Point pages the scan-ners associated with that base or Access Point.  If you want the paging but-ton on your base or Access Point to be disabled, scan the Paging Mode Off bar code, below.  When Paging Mode is off, the base or Access Point will no longer page scanners when the button is pressed.  The red LED on the base or blue LED on the Access Point will remain lit to indicate that Paging Mode is off.  (This light will go out when the button is pressed, then back on when it’s released.)  Default = Paging Mode On.Scanning in Cradle Off* Scanning in Cradle OnShut Down Scanner in Cradle* Paging Mode OnPaging Mode Off
3 - 11Paging PitchWhen you press the Page button on the base or Access Point, the scan-ners associated with that base or Access Point will begin beeping (see Page Button on page 3-5).  You can set the pitch of the paging beep for each scanner by scanning one of the following bar codes.  Default = Low.Error IndicatorsBeeper Pitch - Base ErrorNote: This feature only applies to the CCB01-010BT base.The CCB01-010BT base can be configured to beep at a particular pitch when an error occurs, such as transmission problems to a host system.  The beeper pitch codes modify the pitch (frequency) of the error tone the base emits when there is an error.  Default = Low.Number of Beeps - Base ErrorNote: This feature only applies to the CCB01-010BT base.* Low (1000 Hz)Medium (3250 Hz)High (4200 Hz)* Razz (250 Hz)Medium (3250 Hz)High (4200 Hz)
3 - 12The number of beeps and LED flashes emitted by the CCB01-010BT base for an error condition can be programmed from 1 - 9.  For example, if you program this option to have five error beeps, there will be five error beeps and five LED flashes in response to an error.  To change the number of error beeps, scan the bar code below and then scan a digit (1-9) bar code and the Save bar code on the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  Default = 1.Scanner ReportScan the bar code below to generate a report for the connected scanners.  The report indicates the port, work group, scanner name, and address.  To assign a name to your scanner, refer to Menu Command Syntax, page 11-1.Scanner AddressScan the bar code below to determine the address of the scanner you are using.Base or Access Point AddressScan the bar code below to determine the address of the base or Access Point you are using.Number of Base Error Beeps/LED FlashesScanner ReportScanner AddressBase Address
3 - 13Scanner ModesYour scanner is capable of working in single scanner mode, multiple scanner mode, or with Bluetooth devices other than the charge base or Access Point.Charge Only ModeThere may be times when you want to charge your scanner, but not link to the base.  For example, if a scanner is linked to an Access Point or other Bluetooth device and you need to charge the scanner, but want to retain your existing link.  In order to program the base for Charge Only Mode, you must link a scan-ner to it.  Once the scanner is linked to the base, scan the Charge Only Mode bar code.  Any subsequent scanners placed in that base will charge without linking to it.  The scanner used to program the base remains linked to the base.  To unlink this scanner, scan Unlink Scanner on page 3-14. Note: When in Charge Only Mode, the scanner periodically wakes up and beeps.  See "Power Up Beeper" on page 4-1 to change this setting.If you want to charge a scanner and link to the base, use Charge and Link Mode.  If the base is programmed for Charge Only Mode, you must link a scanner to it first in order to program it for Charge and Link Mode.  Scan the linking bar code on the base to link the scanner, then scan Charge and Link Mode.  Default = Charge and Link Mode. Linked ModesLocked Link Mode and Open Link Mode are the link modes that accommo-date different applications.  Scan the appropriate bar codes included in the Open Link and Locked Link Mode explanations that follow to switch from one mode to another.  Default = Open Link Mode.Charge Only Mode* Charge and Link Mode
3 - 14Locked Link Mode - Single ScannerIf you link a scanner to a base or an Access Point using the Locked Link Mode, other scanners are blocked from being linked if they are inadvertently placed into the base, or if the Access Point linking bar code is scanned.  If you do place a different scanner into a base, it will charge the scanner, but the scanner will not be linked. To use a different scanner, you need to unlink the original scanner by scanning the Unlink Scanner bar code. (See Scanner Modes, page 3-13.)Open Link Mode - Single ScannerWhen newly shipped or defaulted to factory settings, a scanner is not linked to a base or an Access Point.  A link is established when the scanner is placed into a base, or an Access Point linking bar code is scanned.  When in Open Link Mode, a new link is established when a new scanner is placed in the base, or you scan an Access Point linking bar code.  Each time a scanner is placed into a base or scans an Access Point linking bar code, the scanner becomes linked to the base or Access point and the old scanner is unlinked.Unlinking the ScannerIf a base or an Access Point has a scanner linked to it, that scanner must be unlinked before a new scanner can be linked.  Once the previous scanner is unlinked, it will no longer communicate with the base or Access Point.  To unlink the scanner from a base or an Access Point, scan the Unlink Scanner bar code below.Locked Link Mode(Single Scanner)* Open Link Mode(Single Scanner)Unlink Scanner
3 - 15Override Locked ScannerIf you need to replace a broken or lost scanner that is linked to a base or an Access Point, scan the Override Locked Scanner bar code below with a new scanner and place that scanner in the base, or scan the Access Point linking bar code.  The locked link will be overridden; the broken or lost scanner’s link with the base or Access Point will be removed, and the new scanner will be linked.Out-of-Range AlarmIf your scanner is out range of the base, an alarm sounds from both your base and scanner.  If your scanner is out range of an Access Point, an alarm sounds from just the scanner.  The alarm stops when the scanner is moved closer to the base or Access Point, when the base or Access Point connects to another scan-ner, or when the alarm duration expires.  To activate the alarm options for the scanner or the base and to set the alarm duration, scan the appropriate bar code below and then set the time-out duration (from 0-3000 seconds) by scan-ning digits on the Programming Chart inside the back cover, then scanning Save.  Default = 0 sec (no alarm).Note: If you are out of range when you scan a bar code, you will receive an error tone even if you do not have the alarm set.  You receive the error tone since the data could not be communicated to the base or Access Point or the host.Alarm Sound TypeYou may change the alarm type for the scanner or a CCB01-010BT base by scanning the appropriate bar code below and then scanning a digit (0-7) bar code and the Save bar code on the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  Default = 0.  Override Locked Scanner(Single Scanner)Base Alarm DurationScanner Alarm DurationNote: The Access Point does not have a base alarm.
3 - 16The sounds are as follows:Scanner Power Time-Out TimerNote: Scanner Power Time-out Timer only applies to cordless systems.  It does not apply to corded scanners.When there is no activity within a specified time period, the scanner enters low power mode.  Scan the appropriate scanner power time-out bar code to change the time-out duration (in seconds).Note:  Scanning zero (0) is the equivalent of setting no time-out.Setting Sound0 3 long beeps, medium pitch1 3 long beeps, high pitch2 4 short beeps, medium pitch3 4 short beeps, high pitch4 single chirps, medium pitch5 2 chirps, then 1 chirp, medium pitch6 single chirps, high pitch7 2 chirps, then 1 chirp, high pitchBase Alarm TypeScanner Alarm TypeNote: Only the CCB01-010BT base has an alarm
3 - 17If there are no trigger pulls during the timer interval, the scanner goes into power down mode.  Whenever the trigger is enabled, the timer is reset.  If the scanner is placed in the charge base cradle and the battery is in the process of being charged, the scanner will not go into power down mode.  Default = 3600 seconds.Note: When the scanner is in power down mode, pull the trigger to power the unit back up.  There will be a set of power up beeps and a delay of up to a few seconds for the radio to join.  The scanner will then be ready to use.0 seconds200 seconds400 seconds900 seconds* 3600 seconds7200 seconds
3 - 18Flexible Power ManagementIf you are experiencing network performance issues, and suspect the scanner is interfering with other devices, you can turn down the power output of the scan-ner.  This reduces the range between the scanner and a base or an Access Point as shown in the following illustration:Scan one of the bar codes below to set the scanner’s power output to Full Power (100%), Medium Power (35%), Medium Low Power (5%), or Low Power (1%).   Default = Full Power.For the new power setting to take effect, the scanner and the base or Access Point must be reset.  See Reset Scanner and Base/Access Point (page 3-19).Note: Setting a Granit scanner to anything lower than Full Power changes it to Class II Bluetooth.Full PowerReduced Power1902Scanner802.11LAN* Full PowerMedium PowerMedium Low PowerLow Power
3 - 19Reset Scanner and Base/Access PointOnce the power level is set, you must scan the Reset Base bar code and wait for the scanner to unlink and relink to a base or an Access Point.  Once that is done, scan the Reset Scanner bar code and wait for the base or Access Point to unlink and relink to the scanner.Batch ModeBatch mode is used to store bar code data when a scanner is out of range of its base or Access Point, or when performing inventory.  The data is transmitted to the base or Access Point once the scanner is back in range or when the records are manually transmitted.  Note: Batch mode has limitations when using multiple scanners to one base or Access Point.  If a cordless system is being used in "multiple link mode," where up to 7 scanners are to be connected to one base or Access Point, some accumulated or batched scans could be lost if scanners are constantly being moved in and out of range.Automatic Batch Mode stores bar code data when the scanner is out of range of the base or Access Point.  The data is automatically transmitted to the base or Access Point once the scanner is back in range.  When the scanner’s buffer space is full, any bar codes scanned generate an error tone.  In order to scan bar codes again, the scanner must be moved back into range of the base or Access Point so data can be transmitted. Inventory Batch Mode stores bar code data, whether or not you are in range of the base or Access Point.  To transmit the stored data to the base or Access Point, either place the scanner in the base, or scan Transmit Inventory Records (page 3-24).  When the scanner’s buffer space is full, any bar codes scanned generate an error tone.  In order to scan bar codes again, the data must be transmitted to the base or Access Point.  Once the data is transmitted, it is cleared in the scanner.Persistent Batch Mode is the same as Inventory Batch Mode, except that once the data is transmitted to the base or Access Point, it is retained in the scanner.  If you want to transmit more than once, you can do so using this mode.  In order to clear the scanner’s buffer, you must scan Clear All Codes (see page 3-24).:*:RESET_.³Reset ScannerReset Base
3 - 20Default = Batch Mode Off.Batch Mode BeepWhen scanning in Inventory Batch Mode (page 3-20), the scanner beeps every time a bar code is scanned.   If using a Granit scanner, it also vibrates.  When Batch Mode Beep is On, you will also hear a click when each bar code is sent to the host.  If you do not want to hear these clicks, scan Batch Mode Beep Off.  Default = Batch Mode Beep On.Batch Mode StorageWhen a scanner is storing data during a Batch Mode process, you can select whether the data is stored in Flash memory or in RAM.  Flash Storage: The scanner writes any untransmitted data to flash mem-ory prior to powering down.  The data will still be there when the scanner powers back up.  However, the scanner will power down, even with untrans-mitted data, if it reaches a power down timeout or if the battery power is very low. Automatic Batch Mode* Batch Mode OffInventory Batch ModePersistent Batch Mode* Batch Mode Beep OnBatch Mode Beep Off
3 - 21RAM Storage: The scanner will not power down while it contains data that has not been transmitted to the base or Access Point, even if it reaches a power down timeout.  However, if the scanner runs out of battery power, it will power down and the data will be lost.Default = Flash Storage.Batch Mode QuantityWhen in Batch Mode, you may wish to transmit the number of multiple bar codes scanned, rather than a single bar code multiple times.  For example, if you scan three bar codes called XYZ with Batch Mode Quantity Off, when you transmit your data it will appear as XYZ three times.  Using Batch Mode Quantity On and the Quantity Codes (page 3-22), you could output your data as “XYZ, 00003” instead.Note: If you wish to format your output, for example, place a CR or tab between the bar code data and the quantity, refer to Data Formatting beginning on page 6-1.Default = Batch Mode Quantity Off. Entering QuantitiesQuantity Codes (page 3-22) allow you to enter a quantity for the last item scanned, up to 9999 (default = 1).  Quantity digits are shifted from right to left, so if a 5th digit is scanned, the 1st digit scanned is discarded and the 2nd, 3rd and 4th digits are moved to the left to accommodate the new digit.  For example, if the Quantity 5 bar code is scanned after the quantity has been set to 1234, then the 1 is dropped, the quantity will be 2345.RAM Storage* Flash StorageBatch Mode Quantity On* Batch Mode Quantity Off
3 - 22Example: Add a quantity of 5 for the last item scanned.1. Scan the item's bar code.2. Scan the quantity 5 bar code.Example: Add a quantity of 1,500 for the last item scanned.1. Scan the item's bar code. 2. Scan the quantity 1 bar code.3. Scan the quantity 5 bar code.4. Scan the quantity 0 bar code.5. Scan the quantity 0 bar code.Example: Change a quantity of 103 to 10.To correct an incorrect quantity, scan the quantity 0 bar code to replace the incorrect digits, then scan the correct quantity bar codes.1. Scan the quantity 0 bar code to change the quantity to 1030.2. Scan the quantity 0 bar code to change the quantity to 0300.3. Scan the quantity 1 bar code to change the quantity to 3001.4. Scan the quantity 0 bar code to change the quantity to 0010.Default = 1.Quantity Codes01234
3 - 23Batch Mode Output OrderWhen batch data is transmitted, select whether you want that data sent as FIFO (first-in first-out), or LIFO (last-in first-out).  Default = Batch Mode FIFO.56789Batch Mode LIFO* Batch Mode FIFO
3 - 24Total RecordsIf you wish to output the total number of bar codes scanned when in Batch Mode, scan Total Records.  Delete Last CodeIf you want to delete the last bar code scanned when in Batch Mode, scan Delete Last Code.Clear All CodesIf you want to clear the scanner’s buffer of all data accumulated in Batch Mode, scan Clear All Codes.Transmit Records to HostIf you are operating in Inventory Batch Mode (see Inventory Batch Mode on page 3-20), you must scan the following bar code to transmit all the stored data to the host system.Total Records Delete Last CodeClear All CodesTransmit Inventory Records
3 - 25Batch Mode Transmit DelaySometimes when accumulated scans are sent to the host system, the transmission of those scans is too fast for the application to process.  To program a transmit delay between accumulated scans, scan one of the fol-lowing delays.  Default = Off.Note: In most cases, a short (250 ms (milliseconds)) delay is ideal, however, longer delays may be programmed.  Contact Technical Support (page 14-1) for additional information.Multiple Scanner OperationNote: Multiple Scanner Operation Mode allows you to link up to 7 scanners to one base or Access Point.  You cannot join an 8th scanner until you unlink one of the 7 scanners or take a scanner out of range.* Batch Mode Transmit Delay Off(No Delay)Batch Mode Transmit Delay Short(250 ms)Batch Mode Transmit Delay Medium(500 ms)Batch Mode Transmit Delay Long(1000 ms)
3 - 26To put the scanner in multiple scanner mode, scan the bar code below.  Once you scan this bar code, the scanner is unlinked from the base or Access Point and must either be placed into the base, or you must scan the Access Point link-ing bar code in order to relink.Scanner NameYou may assign a name to each scanner you are using for identification pur-poses.  For example, you may want to have a unique identifier for a scanner that is receiving imaging commands sent from the base or Access Point.The default name is in the format “ScannerName_Model_SN_XXXXXXXXXX”  If you have more than one scanner linked to a base, and they all have the same name, the first scanner linked to the base receives commands.  When renaming a series of scanners with identical names, unlink all except one of the scanners from the base.Perform the rename operation using either the bar codes on page 3-27, or by sending the serial command :ScannerName:BT_NAMNewName. where ScannerName is the current name of the scanner, and NewName is the new name for the scanner.  If you wish to change the names of additional scanners, link them one at a time and repeat the :ScannerName:BT_NAMNewName. command for each scanner. To rename scanners with sequential, numeric names, scan the bar codes below.  Scan the Reset code after each name change and wait for the scanner to relink to the base or Access Point before scanning a bar code to rename the next scanner.Multiple Scanner Operation000100020003
3 - 27You may also scan the Scanner Name bar code below and scan a number for the scanner name.  For example, if you wanted to name the linked scanner “312,” you would scan the bar code below, scan the 3, 1, and 2 bar codes on the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual, then scan Save.  Scan the Reset bar code and wait for the scanner to relink to the base.  Application Work GroupsYour cordless system can have up to 7 scanners linked to one base or Access Point.  You can also have up to 7 work groups.  If you want to have all of the scanners’ settings programmed alike, you don’t need to use more than 1 work group.  If you want each scanner to have unique settings (e.g., beeper volume, prefix/suffix, data formatter), then you may program each scanner to its own unique work group and may program each scanner independently.  For exam-ple, you might want to have multiple work groups in a retail/warehouse applica-tion where you need to have different data appended to bar codes used in the warehouse area versus the retail area.  You could assign all the scanners in the retail area to one work group and those in the warehouse to another.  Conse-0004000500060007ResetScanner Name
3 - 28quently, any desired changes to either the retail or warehouse area would apply to all scanners in that particular work group.  Honeywell’s online configuration tool, EZConfig-Scanning (page 10-2), makes it easy for you to program your system for use with multiple scanners and multiple work groups.The scanner keeps a copy of the menu settings it is using.  Whenever the scan-ner is connected or reconnected to a base or an Access Point, the scanner is updated with the latest settings from the base or Access Point for its work group.  The scanner also receives menu setting changes processed by the base or Access Point.  If a scanner is removed from a base or an Access Point and placed into another base or linked to another Access Point, it will be updated with the new base/Access Point settings for whatever work group to which that the scanner was previously assigned.  For example, if the scanner was in work group 1 linked to the first base, it will be placed in work group 1 in the second base with the associated settings.Application Work Group SelectionThis programming selection allows you to assign a scanner to a work group by scanning the bar code below.  You may then program the settings (e.g., beeper volume, prefix/suffix, data formatter) that your application requires.  Default = Group 0.* Group 0Group 1Group 2Group 3Group 4
3 - 29Resetting the Factory Defaults: All Application Work GroupsThe following bar code defaults all of the work groups to the factory default set-tings.To see what the factory default settings are, refer to the table of Menu Commands, beginning on page 11-5.  The standard product default settings for each of the commands are indicated by an asterisk (*).  Note: Scanning this bar code also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked.  The scanner must be placed in the base, or the Access Point linking bar code must be scanned to re-establish the link.  Refer to Scanner Modes, page 3-13 for additional information.If your scanner is in multiple scanner mode, you will hear up to 30 seconds of beeping while all scanners are relinked to the base or Access Point and the settings are changed. Group 5Group 6Factory Default Settings:All Work GroupsPAPDFT&
3 - 30Resetting the Custom Defaults: All Application Work GroupsIf you want the custom default settings restored to all of the work groups, scan the Custom Product Default Settings bar code below.  (If there are no custom defaults, it will reset the work groups to the factory defaults.)  See Setting Custom Defaults on page 1-15 for further information about custom defaults.Note: Scanning this bar code also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked.  The scanner must be placed in its base, or the Access Point linking bar code must be scanned to re-establish the link.  Refer to Scanner Modes, page 3-13 for additional information.  If your scanner is in multiple scanner mode, you will hear up to 30 seconds of beeping while all scanners are relinked to the base or Access Point and the settings are changed. Using the Scanner with Bluetooth DevicesThe scanner can be used either with the charge base, an Access Point, or with other Bluetooth devices.  Those devices include personal computers, laptops, PDAs, and Honeywell mobility systems devices.Bluetooth HID Keyboard ConnectYour scanner can be paired with Bluetooth-capable devices, such as iPads, smart phones, and laptops, so that scanned data appears on your device screen as though it was entered on the keyboard.  In order to pair with the Bluetooth device: 1. Scan the Bluetooth HID Keyboard Connect bar code below. 2. Set the Bluetooth-capable host device so it searches for other Bluetooth devices.  (Refer to your device’s User’s Guide for pairing instructions.) Custom Default Settings:All Work GroupsBluetooth HID Keyboard Connect
3 - 313. Once your host device has located the scanner, select the scanner name.  The host generates and displays a random PIN that must be scanned within 60 seconds.  You must quickly scan Bluetooth PIN Code, then the numbers below, then Save.Bluetooth PIN Code0123456
3 - 32Bluetooth HID Keyboard DisconnectIf your scanner has been connected directly to an iPad, smart phone, or laptop using Bluetooth HID Keyboard Connect (page 3-30), you must dis-connect it in order to once again communicate with the base or Access Point.  Scan the Bluetooth HID Keyboard Disconnect bar code to unlink the scanner from the currently linked host.  Scan the linking bar code on the base or Access Point to relink the scanner.Bluetooth Serial Port - PCs/LaptopsScanning the Non-Base BT Connection bar code below allows the scan-ner to be used with other Bluetooth devices (e.g., PC/laptop).  When in this mode, the scanner behaves like an RS-232 serial device, and you will need to open a COM port on the host to read scanned data.  789SaveBluetooth HID Keyboard Disconnect
3 - 33After you scan the bar code below, follow the instructions supplied with your Bluetooth device to locate the scanner and connect to it.  If you go out of range with your scanner, the scanner will not reconnect to the Bluetooth device when it is back in range.  If you want to relink to the charge base or Access Point, refer to Override Locked Scanner, page 3-15.Note: The multiple work groups option is not available when you are using the scanner with Bluetooth devices other than the charge base or Access Point.PDAs/Mobility Systems DevicesYou may also use the scanner with a PDA or a Honeywell Mobility Systems device.  Scan the bar code below and follow the instructions supplied with your Bluetooth device to locate the scanner, and connect with it.  Changing the Scanner’s Bluetooth PIN Code Some devices require a PIN code as part of the Bluetooth security features.  Your scanner’s default PIN is 1234, which you may need to enter the first time you connect to your PDA or PC.  The PIN code must be between 1 and 16 characters.  To change the PIN, scan the bar code below and then scan the appropriate numeric bar codes from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  Scan Save to save your selection.Minimizing Bluetooth/ISM Band Network ActivityThe settings described below can help you customize the relinking behavior of the cordless area-imaging system to obtain the best compromise between con-venience and low interference.Note: ISM band refers to the 2.4 to 2.48 GHz frequency band used by wireless networks, cordless phones, and Bluetooth.Non-Base BT ConnectionBT Connection - PDA/Mobility Systems DeviceBluetooth PIN
3 - 34Auto Reconnect ModeAuto Reconnect controls whether or not the scanner automatically begins the relink process when a loss of connection is detected.  When the Auto Reconnect On bar code is scanned, the scanner begins the relink process immediately, without user intervention.  Default = Auto Reconnect On.Note: If you are connecting to a Bluetooth Interface Module, set Auto Reconnect to Off.The table below shows the results of the Auto Reconnect On and Off set-tings: Event Auto Reconnect On Auto Reconnect OffScanner out of rangeRelink occurs automatically.  If maximum number of link attempts is unsuccessful, then the scanner must be relinked by either pulling the trigger, placing the scanner in the base, or scanning the Access Point linking bar code.  (See Maximum Link Attempts on page 3-35.)The scanner is relinked by pulling the trigger, or scanning the Access Point linking bar code.Base or Access point reset (firmware upgrade or power cycle)Scanner behaves as if out of range.No attempt to relink made while base or Access Point is powered off.  Trigger must be pulled to initiate relinking.* Auto Reconnect OnAuto Reconnect Off
3 - 35Maximum Link AttemptsThe Maximum Link Attempts setting controls the number of times the scan-ner tries to form a connection with a base or an Access Point.  During the connection setup process, the scanner transmits in order to search for and connect to a base or an Access Point.  In order to prevent continuous trans-missions that could interfere with other users of the ISM band, the number of attempts to connect is limited by this setting.  After the maximum number of attempts is reached, the scanner will not attempt to reconnect to a base or an Access Point.  Pressing the trigger, scanning an Access Point linking bar code, or placing the scanner in the cradle resets the attempt count and the scanner will again try to link.  Scan the Maximum Link Attempts bar code, then scan the number of attempts for the setting (from 0-100) from the inside back cover.  Scan Save to save the setting.  Default = 0.Note: When Auto Reconnect Mode is On, setting Maximum Link Attempts to zero will cause the scanner to try to link until the Power Time-Out Timer setting (see page 3-16) expires.  When Auto Reconnect Mode is Off, setting Maximum Link Attempts to zero will cause the scanner to only attempt linking one time after a trigger pull.Scanner power down due to Power Time-Out Timer setting (see page 4-9)Trigger must be pulled, Access Point linking bar code must be scanned, or the scanner must be placed in the base unit to relink.(Note: scanner relinks on power up, but powers on due to one of the above actions.)Scanner reset due to firmware upgradeRelink occurs automatically.Scanner reset due to battery changeRelink occurs automatically.Scanner placed in different base unitRelink to new base occurs automatically.Event Auto Reconnect On Auto Reconnect OffMaximum Link Attempts
3 - 36Relink Time-OutRelink Time-Out controls the idle time between relink attempts.  An attempt to link a scanner to a base or an Access Point typically lasts up to 5 sec-onds.  This is the time when the scanner is actually attempting a contact .  Relink Time-Out controls the amount of time, in seconds, that elapses between the end of one connection attempt and the start of the next.Note: The length of time for an attempt depends on the number of scanners connected to a base unit or Access Point.  An extra 7 seconds may be required when a connection is successful.Scan the Relink Time-Out bar code, then scan the number of seconds for the setting (from 1-100) from the inside back cover.  Scan Save to save the setting.  Default = 3 seconds.Bluetooth/ISM Network Activity ExamplesDefault valuesWhen the scanner goes out of range, the scanner repeatedly attempts to connect to the base unit or Access Point.  Each attempt consists of approx-imately 5 seconds of active time followed by 3 seconds of idle time.  After one hour, the scanner powers off and batch mode data is lost.Maximum Link Attempts set to 15Other values at default settingWhen the scanner goes out of range, 15 attempts are made to link to the base unit or Access Point.  Each attempt consists of approximately 5 sec-onds of active time followed by 3 seconds of idle time.  After 15 cycles (8*15 =120), or about 2 minutes, the scanner stops trying to connect to the base or Access Point, but retains any bar codes that may have been saved in batch mode.  After one hour, the scanner powers off and batch mode data is lost.Auto Reconnect Mode set to 0Maximum Link Attempts set to 15Other values at default settingWhen the scanner goes out of range, no action is taken to relink.  When  the trigger is pulled, 15 attempts are made to link to the base or Access Point.  Each attempt consists of approximately 5 seconds of active time fol-lowed by 3 seconds of idle time.  After 15 cycles (8*15 =120), or about 2 minutes, the scanner stops trying to connect to the base or Access Point, but retains any bar codes that may have been saved in batch mode.  After one hour, the scanner powers off and batch mode data is lost. Refer to Auto Reconnect Mode, page 3-34, to review other events that can start the relink process.Relink Time-Out
3 - 37Auto Reconnect Mode set to 1Maximum Link Attempts set to 0 Relink Time-Out set to 10Scanner Power Time-Out Timer set to 1800Note: See Scanner Power Time-Out Timer on page 3-16.The scanner attempts to connect to the base or Access Point every 15 sec-onds, measured from one attempt start to the next attempt start.  After one half hour, the scanner powers off.Host AcknowledgmentSome applications require that the host terminal (or server) validate incoming bar code data (database look-up) and provide acknowledgement to the scanner whether or not to proceed.  In Host ACK Mode, the scanner waits for this acknowledgement after each scan.  Visual and audible acknowledgements pro-vide valuable feedback to the scan operator.  The Host ACK functionality is con-trolled via a number of pre-defined escape commands that are sent to the scanner to make it behave in different ways.Note: System performance degrades when using Host ACK at rates lower than 9600 baud.The following criteria must be met for the Host ACK to work correctly:• The cordless system must be configured for Host Port RS232 (terminal ID = 000)  or USB COM Emulation (terminal ID = 130).• RTS/CTS is defaulted off.  You must enable it if the host system requires it.• Host ACK must be set to On (page 3-38). • A comma must be used as a terminator.• The host terminal software must be capable of interpreting the bar code data, make decisions based on the data content, and send out appropriate escape commands to the scanner.Escape commands are addressed to the scanner via “Application Work Groups.” Once a command is sent, all scanners in a group respond to that com-mand.  Because of this, it is recommended that each scanner is assigned to its own group in Host ACK mode.The commands to which the scanner responds are listed on page 3-38.  The [ESC] is a 1B in hex.  A typical command string is y [ESC] x, where “y” is the application work group number, “[ESC] x” is the escape command, and the comma is the terminator, which is required.  (When “y” is not specified, the com-mand is sent to the default Application Work Group 0.)Example: Commands may be strung together to create custom response sequences.  An example of a command string is listed below.0[ESC]4,[ESC]5,[ESC]6,The above example will make a scanner that is in application work group zero beep low, then medium, then high.
3 - 38Example: A good read beep is required for any item on file, but a razz or error tone is required if the item is not on file.  In this case,[ESC]7, is sent to the host for an on-file product[ESC]8,[ESC]8, is sent to the host for a not-on-file productWhen a bar code is scanned, the scanner enters a timeout period until either the host ACK sequence is received, or the timeout expires (in 10 seconds, by default).Once Host ACK is enabled, the system works as follows when a bar code is scanned:• The scanner reads the code and sends data to the base or Access Point to transmit to the host system.  No audible or visual indication is emitted until the scanner receives an escape command.  The scanner read illumination goes out when there’s a successful read.• Scanner operation is suspended until 1) a valid escape string is received from the host system or 2) the scanner times out.• Once condition 1 or 2 above has been met, the scanner is ready to scan again, and the process repeats.A time-out occurs if the scanner does not receive a valid escape command within 10 seconds.  A time-out is indicated by an error tone.  If a time-out occurs, the operator should check the host system to understand why a response to the scanner was not received.Host ACK On/OffHost ACK ResponsesCommand Action[ESC] a, Double beeps to indicate a successful menu change was made.[ESC] b, Razz or error tone to indicate a menu change was unsuccessful.[ESC] 1, The green LED illuminates for 135 milliseconds followed by a pause.Host ACK On* Host ACK Off
3 - 39[ESC] 2, The green LED illuminates for 2 seconds followed by a pause.[ESC] 3, The green LED illuminates for 5 seconds followed by a pause.[ESC] 4, Emits a beep at a low pitch.[ESC] 5, Emits a beep at a medium pitch.[ESC] 6, Emits a beep at a high pitch.[ESC] 7, Beeps to indicate a successful decode and communication to host. [ESC] 8,[ESC] 8, Razz or error tone to indicate a decode/communication to host was unsuccessful.Command Action
3 - 40
4 - 14Input/Output SettingsPower Up BeeperNote: This feature does not apply to the CCB02-100BT base.The scanner can be programmed to beep when it’s powered up.  If you are using a cordless system, the base can also be programmed to beep when it is powered up.  Scan the Off bar code(s) if you don’t want a power up beep.  Default = Power Up Beeper On - Scanner.Power Up Beeper Off - Scanner* Power Up Beeper On - ScannerPower Up Beeper Off - Cordless BasePower Up Beeper On - Cordless Base
4 - 2Beep on BEL CharacterYou may wish to force the scanner to beep upon a command sent from the host.  If you scan the Beep on BEL On bar code below, the scanner will beep every time a BEL character is received from the host.  Default = Beep on BEL Off.Trigger ClickTo hear an audible click every time the scanner trigger is pressed, scan the Trigger Click On bar code below.  Scan the Trigger Click Off code if you don’t wish to hear the click.  (This feature has no effect on serial or automatic trigger-ing.)  Default = Trigger Click Off.Good Read and Error IndicatorsBeeper – Good ReadThe beeper may be programmed On or Off in response to a good read.  Turning this option off only turns off the beeper response to a good read indication.  All error and menu beeps are still audible.  Default = Beeper - Good Read On.*Beep on BEL OffBeep on BEL OnTrigger Click On*Trigger Click Off* Beeper - Good Read On Beeper - Good Read Off
4 - 3Beeper Volume – Good ReadThe beeper volume codes modify the volume of the beep the scanner emits on a good read.  Default = High.Beeper Pitch – Good ReadThe beeper pitch codes modify the pitch (frequency) of the beep the scan-ner emits on a good read.  The Medium pitch differs for the Xenon and Gra-nit scanners.  Default = Medium. LowMedium* HighOffLow (1600 Hz)* Medium - Xenon (2700 Hz)
4 - 4Vibrate – Good ReadNote: Vibration settings apply only to Granit Devices.The scanner vibrates once when a bar code is successfully read, and twice when a programming bar code is successfully read.  When a programming bar code is unsuccessful, the scanner emits one long vibration (2 times the Vibrate Duration length).  Scan Vibrate - Good Read Off to keep the scan-ner from vibrating.     Default = Vibrate - Good Read On.Vibrate DurationIf you want to set the length for the good read vibration, scan the bar code below, then set the duration (from 100 - 2,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the inside back cover, then scanning Save.  Default = 300 ms.* Medium - Granit (3200 Hz)High (4200 Hz) * Vibrate- Good Read OnVibrate- Good Read OffVibrate Duration
4 - 5Beeper Pitch – ErrorThe beeper pitch codes modify the pitch (frequency) of the sound the scan-ner emits when there is a bad read or error.  Default = Razz.Beeper Duration – Good ReadThe beeper duration codes modify the length of the beep the scanner emits on a good read.  Default = Normal.LED – Good ReadThe LED indicator can be programmed On or Off in response to a good read.  Default = On.* Razz (250 Hz)Medium (3250 Hz)High (4200 Hz)* Normal BeepShort BeepShort Beep* LED - Good Read OnLED - Good Read Off
4 - 6Number of Beeps – Good ReadThe number of beeps of a good read can be programmed from 1 - 9.  The same number of beeps will be applied to the beeper and LED in response to a good read.  For example, if you program this option to have five beeps, there will be five beeps and five LED flashes in response to a good read.  The beeps and LED flashes are in sync with one another.  To change the number of beeps, scan the bar code below and then scan a digit (1-9) bar code and the Save bar code on the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  Default = 1.Number of Beeps – ErrorThe number of beeps and LED flashes emitted by the scanner for a bad read or error can be programmed from 1 - 9.  For example, if you program this option to have five error beeps, there will be five error beeps and five LED flashes in response to an error.  To change the number of error beeps, scan the bar code below and then scan a digit (1-9) bar code and the Save bar code on the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  Default = 1.Beeper Volume MaxNote: The Beeper Volume Max feature only applies to Granit products.Scan the following bar code to set all error and good read beeps to the maximum volume.  This feature also sets the Beeper Pitch – Good Read to the highest level.Number of Good Read Beeps/LED FlashesNumber of Error Beeps/LED FlashesBeeper Volume Max
4 - 7Good Read DelayThis sets the minimum amount of time before the scanner can read another bar code.  Default = 0 ms (No Delay).User-Specified Good Read DelayIf you want to set your own length for the good read delay, scan the bar code below, then set the delay (from 0 - 30,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the inside back cover, then scanning Save. Manual Trigger ModesWhen in manual trigger mode, the scanner scans until a bar code is read, or until the trigger is released.  Two modes are available, Normal and Enhanced.   Normal mode offers good scan speed and the longest working ranges (depth of field).  Enhanced mode will give you the highest possible scan speed but slightly * No DelayShort Delay (500 ms)Medium Delay (1,000 ms)Long Delay (1,500 ms)User-Specified Good Read Delay
4 - 8less range than Normal mode.  Enhanced mode is best used when you require a very fast scan speed and don’t require a long working range.  Default = Man-ual Trigger-Normal.LED Illumination - Manual TriggerIf you wish to set the illumination LED brightness, scan one of the bar codes below.  This sets the LED illumination for the scanner when the trig-ger is pressed.  Default = High. Note: The Medium setting is not available on Granit devices.  The LEDs are like a flash on a camera.  The lower the ambient light in the room, the brighter the LEDs need to be so the scanner can “see” the bar codes. * Manual Trigger - NormalManual Trigger - EnhancedOffLowMedium* High
4 - 9Serial Trigger ModeYou can activate the scanner either by pressing the trigger, or using a serial trig-ger command (see Trigger Commands on page 11-4).  When in serial mode, the scanner scans until a bar code has been read or until the deactivate com-mand is sent.  The scanner can also be set to turn itself off after a specified time has elapsed (see Read Time-Out, which follows).Read Time-OutUse this selection to set a time-out (in milliseconds) of the scanner’s trigger when using serial commands to trigger the scanner.  Once the scanner has timed out, you can activate the scanner either by pressing the trigger or using a serial trigger command.  After scanning the Read Time-Out bar code, set the time-out duration (from 0-300,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits on the Programming Chart inside the back cover, then scanning Save.  Default = 30,000 ms.Presentation ModePresentation Mode uses ambient light and scanner illumination to detect bar codes.  When in Presentation Mode, the LEDs remain dim until a bar code is presented to the scanner, then the aimer turns on and the LEDs turn up to read the code.  If the light level in the room is not high enough, Presentation Mode may not work properly   Note: If you are using a cordless charge base in Presentation Mode, the battery will not charge unless the power supply is plugged into the base’s auxiliary power port.Scan one of the following bar codes to program either your Xenon or your Granit device for Presentation Mode.Read Time-OutPresentation Mode - XenonPresentation Mode - Granit
4 - 10LED Illumination - Presentation ModeIf you wish to set the illumination LED brightness, scan one of the bar codes below.  This sets the LED illumination for the scanner when it is in Presentation Mode.  (If the scanner is triggered manually, the LED illumina-tion will switch to the setting for a manual trigger. See LED Illumination - Manual Trigger on page 4-8.)  Default = High.Note: The LEDs are like a flash on a camera.  The lower the ambient light in the room, the brighter the LEDs need to be so the scanner can “see” the bar codes. Note: LED Illumination - Presentation Mode does not apply to Streaming Presentation™ Mode or Mobile Phone Read Mode.Presentation LED Behavior after DecodeWhen a scanner is in presentation mode, the LEDs dim 30 seconds after a bar code is decoded.  If you wish to dim the LEDs immediately after a bar code is decoded, scan the LEDs Off bar code, below.  Default = LEDs On.OffLow* High* LEDs OnLEDs Off
4 - 11Presentation SensitivityPresentation Sensitivity is a numeric range that increases or decreases the scanner's reaction time to bar code presentation.  To set the sensitivity, scan the Sensitivity bar code, then scan the degree of sensitivity (from 0-20) from the inside back cover, and Save.  0 is the most sensitive setting, and 20 is the least sensitive.  Default = 1.Presentation CenteringUse Presentation Centering to narrow the scanner’s field of view when it is in the stand to make sure the scanner reads only those bar codes intended by the user.  For instance, if multiple codes are placed closely together, Presentation Centering will insure that only the desired codes are read.  Note: To adjust centering when the scanner is hand-held, see Centering (page 4-19).If a bar code is not touched by a predefined window, it will not be decoded or output by the scanner.  If Presentation Centering is turned on by scan-ning Presentation Centering On, the scanner only reads codes that pass through the centering window you specify using the Top of Presentation Centering Window, Bottom of Presentation Centering Window, Left, and Right of Presentation Centering Window bar codes. Sensitivity
4 - 12In the example below, the white box is the centering window.  The centering window has been set to 20% left, 30% right, 8% top, and 25% bottom.  Since Bar Code 1 passes through the centering window, it will be read.  Bar Code 2 does not pass through the centering window, so it will not be read.Note: A bar code needs only to be touched by the centering window in order to be read.  It does not need to pass completely through the centering window.Scan Presentation Centering On, then scan one of the following bar codes to change the top, bottom, left, or right of the centering window.  Then scan the percent you want to shift the centering window using digits on the inside back cover of this manual.  Scan Save.   Default Presentation Centering = 40% for Top and Left, 60% for Bottom and Right.0Bar Code 1Bar Code 210 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%1009080706050403020100%Presentation Centering On
4 - 13* Presentation Centering OffTop of Presentation Centering Window Bottom of Presentation Centering WindowLeft of Presentation Centering WindowRight of Presentation Centering Window
4 - 14In-Stand Sensor ModeNote: The In-Stand Sensor feature only applies to Xenon products.This feature senses when the scanner is removed from the stand and tells it to begin manual triggering.  When Sensor On is enabled, the scanner defaults to Streaming Presentation Mode when it is in the stand, and to Manual Trigger Mode when it is removed from the stand.  Default = Sensor On.Note: If you are taking images (see Imaging Commands beginning on page 8-1), you must set the In-Stand Sensor to Off.You may program a Streaming Presentation Mode (Normal, Enhanced, or Mobile Phone) you wish to use for in-stand scanning, and a Manual Trigger mode (Normal, Enhanced, or Mobile Phone) you wish to use for out-of-stand scanning.  To do this, you must first scan the preferred Streaming Presentation mode (see below), then scan the Manual Trigger mode (see page 4-7 and page 4-16) you want to use.CodeGate®When CodeGate is On, the trigger is used to allow decoded data to be transmit-ted to the host system.  The scanner remains on, scanning and decoding bar codes, but the bar code data is not transmitted until the trigger is pressed.  When CodeGate is Off, bar code data is transmitted when it is decoded.  Default = CodeGate Off Out-of-Stand.* Sensor OnSensor OffCodeGate OnOut-of-Stand* CodeGate OffOut-of-Stand
4 - 15Streaming Presentation™ ModeWhen in Streaming Presentation mode, the scanner’s aimer goes out after a short time, but the scan illumination remains on all the time to continuously search for bar codes.  Two modes are available, Normal and Enhanced.   Nor-mal mode offers good scan speed and the longest working ranges (depth of field).  Enhanced mode will give you the highest possible scan speed but slightly less range than Normal mode.  Enhanced mode is best used when you require a very fast scan speed and don’t require a long working range.When using Preferred Symbology (page 4-21), a lower priority symbol must be centered on the aiming pattern to be read in Streaming Presentation Mode.Note: If you are using a cordless charge base, it must have an external power supply plugged into the aux port for Streaming Presentation to work properly.Streaming Presentation In-Stand ProgrammingThis option is available when using In-Stand Sensor Mode, page 4-14.  You may program a specific Streaming Presentation Mode for in-stand scan-ning, and a Manual Trigger mode for out-of-stand scanning.  To do this, you must first scan the preferred Streaming Presentation mode (Normal, Enhanced, or Mobile Phone), then scan the Manual Trigger mode (Normal, Enhanced, or Mobile Phone) you want to use.Streaming Presentation Mode - NormalStreaming Presentation Mode - Enhanced
4 - 16Mobile Phone Read ModeWhen this mode is selected, your scanner is optimized to read bar codes from mobile phone or other LED displays.  However, the speed of scanning printed bar codes may be slightly lower when this mode is enabled.  You can enable Mobile Phone Reading for either a hand held device, or for a hands-free (pre-sentation) application.  Note: To turn off Mobil Phone Read Mode, scan a Manual or Serial Trigger Mode bar code (see page 4-7).Hands Free Time-OutThe Scan Stand and Presentation Modes are referred to as “hands free” modes.  If the scanner’s trigger is pulled when using a hands free mode, the scanner changes to manual trigger mode.  You can set the time the scanner should remain in manual trigger mode by setting the Hands Free Time-Out.  Once the time-out value is reached, (if there have been no further trigger pulls) the scanner reverts to the original hands free mode.  Scan the Hands Free Time-Out bar code, then scan the time-out duration (from 0-300,000 milliseconds) from the inside back cover, and Save.   Default = 5,000 ms.Reread DelayThis sets the time period before the scanner can read the same bar code a sec-ond time.  Setting a reread delay protects against accidental rereads of the same bar code.  Longer delays are effective in minimizing accidental rereads.  Hand Held Scanning - Mobile Phone Streaming Presentation - Mobile PhoneHands Free Time-Out
4 - 17Use shorter delays in applications where repetitive bar code scanning is required.  Reread Delay only works when in a Presentation Mode (see page 4-9).  Default = Medium.  User-Specified Reread DelayIf you want to set your own length for the reread delay, scan the bar code below, then set the delay (from 0-30,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the inside back cover, then scanning Save. Short (500 ms)* Medium (750 ms)Long (1000 ms)Extra Long (2000 ms)User-Specified Reread Delay
4 - 18Illumination LightsIf you want the illumination lights on while reading a bar code, scan the Lights On bar code, below.  However, if you want to turn just the lights off, scan the Lights Off bar code.  Default = Lights On.Note: This setting does not affect the aimer light.  The aiming light can be set using Aimer Mode (page 4-19).   Aimer DelayThe aimer delay allows a delay time for the operator to aim the scanner before the picture is taken.  Use these codes to set the time between when the trigger is pulled and when the picture is taken.  During the delay time, the aiming light will appear, but the LEDs won’t turn on until the delay time is over.   Default = Off.  User-Specified Aimer DelayIf you want to set your own length for the duration of the delay, scan the bar code below, then set the time-out by scanning digits (0 - 4,000 ms) from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual, then scan Save.Lights Off* Lights On400 milliseconds* Off (no delay)200 millisecondsDelay Duration
4 - 19Scanner Time-OutNote: Scanner Time-Out applies only to corded scanners.  It does not apply to cordless systems. Scanner Time-Out powers down the scanner after the unit has been idle for the specified time.  To prevent the scanner from powering down, set this time-out to 0, or no timer.  Scan Scanner Time-Out, then set the time-out by scanning dig-its (from 0 - 999,999 ms) from the inside back cover, then scanning Save.  Default = 1 ms.Aimer ModeThis feature allows you to turn the aimer on and off.  When the Interlaced bar code is scanned, the aimer is interlaced with the illumination LEDs.  Default = Interlaced.  CenteringUse Centering to narrow the scanner’s field of view to make sure that when the scanner is hand-held, it reads only those bar codes intended by the user.  For instance, if multiple codes are placed closely together, centering will insure that only the desired codes are read.  (Centering  can be used in conjunction with Aimer Delay, page 4-18, for the most error-free operation in applications where multiple codes are spaced closely together.  Using the Aimer Delay and Center-ing features, the scanner can emulate the operation of older systems, such as linear laser bar code scanners.)Note: To adjust centering when the scanner is in the stand, see Presentation Centering (page 4-11).If a bar code is not touched by a predefined window, it will not be decoded or output by the scanner.  If centering is turned on by scanning Centering On, the scanner only reads codes that pass through the centering window you specify using the Top of Centering Window, Bottom of Centering Window, Left, and Right of Centering Window bar codes. Scanner Time-Out* InterlacedOff
4 - 20In the example below, the white box is the centering window.  The centering window has been set to 20% left, 30% right, 8% top, and 25% bottom.  Since Bar Code 1 passes through the centering window, it will be read.  Bar Code 2 does not pass through the centering window, so it will not be read.Note: A bar code needs only to be touched by the centering window in order to be read.  It does not need to pass completely through the centering window.Scan Centering On, then scan one of the following bar codes to change the top, bottom, left, or right of the centering window.  Then scan the percent you want to shift the centering window using digits on the inside back cover of this manual.  Scan Save.   Default Centering = 40% for Top and Left, 60% for Bot-tom and Right.0Bar Code 1Bar Code 210 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100%1009080706050403020100%Centering On
4 - 21Preferred SymbologyThe scanner can be programmed to specify one symbology as a higher priority over other symbologies in situations where both bar code symbologies appear on the same label, but the lower priority symbology cannot be disabled.For example, you may be using the scanner in a retail setting to read U.P.C. symbols, but have occasional need to read a code on a drivers license.  Since some licenses have a Code 39 symbol as well as the PDF417 symbol, you can use Preferred Symbology to specify that the PDF417 symbol be read instead of the Code 39.Preferred Symbology classifies each symbology as high priority, low priority, or as an unspecified type.  When a low priority symbology is presented, the scanner ignores it for a set period of time (see Preferred Symbology Time-out on page 4-22) while it searches for the high priority symbology.  If a high priority symbology is located during this period, then that data is read immediately. If the time-out period expires before a high priority symbology is read, the scan-ner will read any bar code in its view (low priority or unspecified).  If there is no bar code in the scanner’s view after the time-out period expires, then no data is reported.Note: A low priority symbol must be centered on the aiming pattern to be read.* Centering OffTop of Centering Window Bottom of Centering WindowLeft of Centering WindowRight of Centering Window
4 - 22Scan a bar code below to enable or disable Preferred Symbology.    Default = Preferred Symbology Off.High Priority SymbologyTo specify the high priority symbology, scan the High Priority Symbology bar code below.  On the Symbology Charts on page A-1, find the symbol-ogy you want to set as high priority.  Locate the Hex value for that symbol-ogy and scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart (inside back cover).  Scan Save to save your selection.  Default = NoneLow Priority SymbologyTo specify the low priority symbology, scan the Low Priority Symbology bar code below.  On the Symbology Charts on page A-1, find the symbology you want to set as low priority.  Locate the Hex value for that symbology and scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart (inside back cover).  If you want to set additional low priority symbologies, scan FF, then scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart for the next symbology.  You can program up to 5 low priority symbologies.  Scan Save to save your selection.  Default = NonePreferred Symbology Time-outOnce you have enabled Preferred Symbology and entered the high and low priority symbologies, you must set the time-out period.  This is the period of time the scanner will search for a high priority bar code after a low priority * Preferred Symbology OffPreferred Symbology OnHigh Priority SymbologyLow Priority Symbology
4 - 23bar code has been encountered.  Scan the bar code below, then set the delay (from 1-3,000 milliseconds) by scanning digits from the inside back cover, then scanning Save.  Default = 500 ms.Preferred Symbology DefaultScan the bar code below to set all Preferred Symbology entries to their default values.Output Sequence OverviewRequire Output SequenceWhen turned off, the bar code data will be output to the host as the scanner decodes it.  When turned on, all output data must conform to an edited sequence or the scanner will not transmit the output data to the host device.Note: This selection is unavailable when the Multiple Symbols Selection is turned on.Output Sequence EditorThis programming selection allows you to program the scanner to output data (when scanning more than one symbol) in whatever order your appli-cation requires, regardless of the order in which the bar codes are scanned.  Reading the Default Sequence symbol programs the scanner to the Universal values, shown below.  These are the defaults.  Be certain you want to delete or clear all formats before you read the Default Sequence symbol.Note: To make Output Sequence Editor selections, you’ll need to know the code I.D., code length, and character match(es) your application requires.  Use the Alphanumeric symbols (inside back cover) to read these options.  You must hold the trigger while reading each bar code in the sequence.Preferred Symbology Time-outPreferred Symbology Default
4 - 24To Add an Output Sequence1. Scan the Enter Sequence symbol (see Require Output Sequence, page 4-27).2. Code I.D.On the Symbology Charts on page A-1, find the symbology to which you want to apply the output sequence format.  Locate the Hex value for that symbology and scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart (inside back cover).3. LengthSpecify what length (up to 9999 characters) of data output will be acceptable for this symbology.  Scan the four digit data length from the Programming Chart.  (Note:  50 characters is entered as 0050.  9999 is a universal number, indicating all lengths.)  When calculating the length, you must count any programmed prefixes, suffixes, or formatted characters as part of the length (unless using 9999).4. Character Match SequencesOn the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), page A-4, find the Hex value that represents the character(s) you want to match.  Use the Programming Chart to read the alphanumeric combination that represents the ASCII characters.  (99 is the Universal number, indicating all characters.)5. End Output Sequence EditorScan F F to enter an Output Sequence for an additional symbology, or Save to save your entries.Other Programming Selections•Discard This exits without saving any Output Sequence changes.
4 - 25Output Sequence ExampleIn this example, you are scanning Code 93, Code 128, and Code 39 bar codes, but you want the scanner to output Code 39 1st, Code 128 2nd, and Code 93 3rd, as shown below.Note: Code 93 must be enabled to use this example.You would set up the sequence editor with the following command line:SEQBLK62999941FF6A999942FF69999943FFThe breakdown of the command line is shown below:SEQBLKsequence editor start command62 code identifier for Code 399999 code length that must match for Code 39, 9999 = all lengths41 start character match for Code 39, 41h = “A”FF termination string for first code6A code identifier for Code 1289999 code length that must match for Code 128, 9999 = all lengths42 start character match for Code 128, 42h = “B”FF termination string for second code69 code identifier for Code 939999 code length that must match for Code 93, 9999 = all lengths43 start character match for Code 93, 43h = “C”FF termination string for third codeTo program the previous example using specific lengths, you would have to count any programmed prefixes, suffixes, or formatted characters as part of the length.  If you use the example on page 4-25, but assume a <CR> suffix and specific code lengths, you would use the following command line:SEQBLK62001241FF6A001342FF69001243FFThe breakdown of the command line is shown below:A - Code 39B - Code 128C - Code 93
4 - 26SEQBLKsequence editor start command62 code identifier for Code 390012 A - Code 39 sample length (11) plus CR suffix (1) = 1241 start character match for Code 39, 41h = “A”FF termination string for first code6A code identifier for Code 1280013 B - Code 128 sample length (12) plus CR suffix (1) = 1342 start character match for Code 128, 42h = “B”FF termination string for second code69 code identifier for Code 930012 C - Code 93 sample length (11) plus CR suffix (1) = 1243 start character match for Code 93, 43h = “C”FF termination string for third codeOutput Sequence Editor   Partial SequenceIf an output sequence operation is terminated before all your output sequence criteria are met, the bar code data acquired to that point is a “partial sequence.”  Scan Discard Partial Sequence to discard partial sequences  when the output sequence operation is terminated before completion.  Scan Trans-mit Partial Sequence to transmit partial sequences.  (Any fields in the sequence where no data match occurred will be skipped in the output.)Default SequenceEnter SequenceTransmit Partial Sequence* Discard Partial Sequence
4 - 27Require Output SequenceWhen an output sequence is Required, all output data must conform to an edited sequence or the scanner will not transmit the output data to the host device.  When it’s On/Not Required, the scanner will attempt to get the output data to conform to an edited sequence but, if it cannot, the scanner transmits all output data to the host device as is.When the output sequence is Off, the bar code data is output to the host as the scanner decodes it.  Default = Off. Note: This selection is unavailable when the Multiple Symbols Selection is turned on.Multiple SymbolsWhen this programming selection is turned On, it allows you to read multiple symbols with a single pull of the scanner’s trigger.  If you press and hold the trig-ger, aiming the scanner at a series of symbols, it reads unique symbols once, beeping (if turned on) for each read.   If using a Granit scanner, the scanner also vibrates.  The scanner attempts to find and decode new symbols as long as the trigger is pulled.  When this programming selection is turned Off, the scanner will only read the symbol closest to the aiming beam.  Default = Off. Required On/Not Required *OffOn* Off
4 - 28No ReadWith No Read turned On, the scanner notifies you if a code cannot be read.  If using an EZConfig-Scanning Tool Scan Data Window (see page 10-3), an “NR” appears when a code cannot be read.  If No Read is turned Off, the “NR” will not appear.  Default = Off.If you want a different notation than “NR,” for example, “Error,” or “Bad Code,” you can edit the output message (see Data Formatting beginning on page 6-1).  The hex code for the No Read symbol is 9C.  Video ReverseVideo Reverse is used to allow the scanner to read bar codes that are inverted.  The Video Reverse Off bar code below is an example of this type of bar code.  Scan Video Reverse Only to read only inverted bar codes.  Scan Video Reverse and Standard Bar Codes to read both types of codes. Note: After scanning Video Reverse Only, menu bar codes cannot be read.  You must scan Video Reverse Off or Video Reverse and Standard Bar Codes in order to read menu bar codes.Note: Images downloaded from the unit are not reversed.  This is a setting for decoding only.On* OffVideo Reverse Only* Video Reverse OffVIDREV0.Video Reverse and Standard Bar Codes
4 - 29Working OrientationSome bar codes are direction-sensitive.  For example, KIX codes and OCR can misread when scanned sideways or upside down.  Use the working orientation settings if your direction-sensitive codes will not usually be presented upright to the scanner.  Default = Upright.Default = Upright.Upright:Vertical, Top to Bottom:(Rotate CW 90°)Upside Down:Vertical, Bottom to Top:(Rotate CCW 90°)* UprightUpside DownVertical, Top to BottomVertical, Bottom to Top
4 - 30
5 - 15Data EditingPrefix/Suffix OverviewWhen a bar code is scanned, additional information is sent to the host computer along with the bar code data.  This group of bar code data and additional, user-defined data is called a “message string.”  The selections in this section are used to build the user-defined data into the message string.Prefix and Suffix characters are data characters that can be sent before and after scanned data.  You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with specific symbologies.  The following illustration shows the break-down of a message string:Points to Keep In Mind• It is not necessary to build a message string.  The selections in this chapter are only used if you wish to alter the default settings.  Default prefix = None.  Default suffix = None.• A prefix or suffix may be added or cleared from one symbology or all symbologies.• You can add any prefix or suffix from the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4, plus Code I.D. and AIM I.D.• You can string together several entries for several symbologies at one time.• Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the output.• When setting up for specific symbologies (as opposed to all symbologies), the specific symbology ID value counts as an added prefix or suffix character.• The maximum size of a prefix or suffix configuration is 200 characters, which includes header information.To Add a Prefix or Suffix:Step 1. Scan the Add Prefix or Add Suffix symbol (page 5-3).Step 2. Determine the 2 digit Hex value from the Symbology Chart (included in the Symbology Charts, beginning on page A-1) for the Prefix Scanned DataSuffix1-11alpha numeric &control charactersvariable length1-11alpha numeric &control characters
5 - 2symbology to which you want to apply the prefix or suffix.  For example, for Code 128, Code ID is “j” and Hex ID is “6A”.Step 3. Scan the 2 hex digits from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual or scan 9, 9 for all symbologies.Step 4. Determine the hex value from the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4, for the prefix or suffix you wish to enter. Step 5. Scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.Step 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for every prefix or suffix character.Step 7. To add the Code I.D., scan 5, C, 8, 0. To add AIM I.D., scan 5, C, 8, 1. To add a backslash (\), scan 5, C, 5, C.Note: To add a backslash (\) as in Step 7, you must scan 5C twice – once to create the leading backslash and then to create the backslash itself.Step 8. Scan Save to exit and save, or scan Discard to exit without saving.Repeat Steps 1-6 to add a prefix or suffix for another symbology.Example: Add a Suffix to a specific symbologyTo send a CR (carriage return)Suffix for U.P.C. only:Step 1. Scan Add Suffix.Step 2. Determine the 2 digit hex value from the Symbology Chart (included in the Symbology Charts, beginning on page A-1) for U.P.C..Step 3. Scan 6, 3 from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.Step 4. Determine the hex value from the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4, for the CR (carriage return). Step 5. Scan 0, D from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.Step 6. Scan Save, or scan Discard to exit without saving.To Clear One or All Prefixes or SuffixesYou can clear a single prefix or suffix, or clear all prefixes/suffixes for a symbology.  If you have been entering prefixes and suffixes for single sym-bologies, you can use Clear One Prefix (Suffix) to delete a specific char-acter from a symbology.  When you Clear All Prefixes (Suffixes), all the prefixes or suffixes for a symbology are deleted.
5 - 3Step 1. Scan the Clear One Prefix or Clear One Suffix symbol.Step 2. Determine the 2 digit Hex value from the Symbology Chart (included in the Symbology Charts, beginning on page A-1) for the symbology from which you want to clear the prefix or suffix.Step 3. Scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual or scan 9, 9 for all symbologies.Your change is automatically saved.To Add a Carriage Return Suffix to All SymbologiesScan the following bar code if you wish to add a carriage return suffix to all symbologies at once.  This action first clears all current suffixes, then pro-grams a carriage return suffix for all symbologies.Prefix SelectionsSuffix SelectionsAdd CR SuffixAll SymbologiesAdd PrefixClear One PrefixClear All PrefixesAdd Suffix
5 - 4Function Code TransmitWhen this selection is enabled and function codes are contained within the scanned data, the scanner transmits the function code to the terminal.  Charts of these function codes are provided in Supported Interface Keys starting on page 9-3.  When the scanner is in keyboard wedge mode, the scan code is con-verted to a key code before it is transmitted. Default = Enable.Intercharacter, Interfunction, and Intermessage DelaysSome terminals drop information (characters) if data comes through too quickly.  Intercharacter, interfunction, and intermessage delays slow the transmission of data, increasing data integrity.Clear One SuffixClear All Suffixes* EnableDisable
5 - 5Intercharacter DelayAn intercharacter delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may be placed between the transmission of each character of scanned data.  Scan the Intercharacter Delay bar code below, then scan the number of 5ms delays, and the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.To remove this delay, scan the Intercharacter Delay bar code, then set the number of delays to 0.  Scan the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.Note: Intercharacter delays are not supported in USB serial emulation.User Specified Intercharacter DelayAn intercharacter delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may be placed after the transmission of a particular character of scanned data.  Scan the Delay Length bar code below, then scan the number of 5ms delays, and the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual. Next, scan the Character to Trigger Delay bar code, then the 2-digit hex value for the ASCII character that will trigger the delay ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4.To remove this delay, scan the Delay Length bar code, and set the number of delays to 0.  Scan the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.12345Intercharacter DelayPrefix Scanned Data SuffixIntercharacter DelayDelay LengthCharacter to Trigger Delay
5 - 6Interfunction DelayAn interfunction delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may be placed between the transmission of each control character in the mes-sage string.  Scan the Interfunction Delay bar code below, then scan the number of 5ms delays, and the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.To remove this delay, scan the Interfunction Delay bar code, then set the number of delays to 0.  Scan the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.Intermessage DelayAn intermessage delay of up to 5000 milliseconds (in 5ms increments) may be placed between each scan transmission.  Scan the Intermessage Delay bar code below, then scan the number of 5ms delays, and the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this man-ual.To remove this delay, scan the Intermessage Delay bar code, then set the number of delays to 0.  Scan the Save bar code using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.Interfunction DelaysPrefix Scanned Data Suffix12345STX HT CR LFInterfunction Delay2nd Scan Transmission1st Scan TransmissionIntermessage DelayIntermessage Delay
6 - 16Data FormattingData Format Editor IntroductionYou may use the Data Format Editor to change the scanner’s output.  For exam-ple, you can use the Data Format Editor to insert characters at certain points in bar code data as it is scanned.  The selections in the following pages are used only if you wish to alter the output.  Default Data Format setting = None.Normally, when you scan a bar code, it is output automatically.  However, when you create a format, you must use a “send” command (see Send Commands on page 6-4) within the format program to output data.Multiple formats may be programmed into the scanner.  They are stacked in the order in which they are entered.  However, the following list presents the order in which formats are applied:1. Specific Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Actual Length2. Specific Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Universal Length3. Specific Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Actual Length4. Specific Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Universal Length5. Universal Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Actual Length6. Universal Terminal ID, Actual Code ID, Universal Length7. Universal Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Actual Length8. Universal Terminal ID, Universal Code ID, Universal LengthThe maximum size of a data format configuration is 2000 bytes, which includes header information.If you have changed data format settings, and wish to clear all formats and return to the factory defaults, scan the Default Data Format code below.Add a Data FormatStep 1. Scan the Enter Data Format symbol (page 6-2).Step 2. Select Primary/Alternate FormatDetermine if this will be your primary data format, or one of 3 alternate formats.  This allows you to save a total of 4 different data formats.  To program your primary format, scan 0 using the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  If you are programming an alternate format, scan 1, 2, or 3, depending on which alternate format * Default Data Format
6 - 2you are programming.  (See Primary/Alternate Data Formats on page 6-18 for further information.)Step 3. Terminal TypeRefer to Terminal ID Table (page 6-4) and locate the Terminal ID number for your PC.  Scan three numeric bar codes on the inside back cover to program the scanner for your terminal ID (you must enter 3 digits).  For example, scan 0 0 3 for an AT wedge. Note: 099 indicates all terminal types.Step 4. Code I.D.In the Symbology Charts, beginning on page A-1, find the symbology to which you want to apply the data format.  Locate the Hex value for that symbology and scan the 2 digit hex value from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.If you wish to create a data format for all symbologies, with the excep-tion of some specific symbologies, refer to B8 (page 6-16).If you are creating a data format for Batch Mode Quantity, use 35 for the Code I.D.Note: 99 indicates all symbologies.Step 5. LengthSpecify what length (up to 9999 characters) of data will be acceptable for this symbology.  Scan the four digit data length from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  For example, 50 characters is entered as 0050.  Note: 9999 indicates all lengths.Step 6. Editor CommandsRefer to Data Format Editor Commands (page 6-4).  Scan the symbols that represent the command you want to enter.  94 alphanumeric characters may be entered for each symbology data format.Step 7. Scan Save to save your data format, or Discard to exit without saving your changes.Enter Data Format Save
6 - 3Other Programming SelectionsClear One Data Format This deletes one data format for one symbology.   If you are clearing the primary format, scan 0 from the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  If you are clearing an alternate format, scan 1, 2, or 3, depending on the format you are clearing.  Scan the Terminal Type  and Code I.D. (see Symbology Charts on page A-1), and the bar code data length for the specific data format that you want to delete.  All other formats remain unaffected.Clear all Data FormatsThis clears all data formats.Save to exit and save your data format changes.Discard to exit without saving any data format changes.DiscardClear One Data FormatClear All Data FormatsSaveDiscard
6 - 4Data Format Editor CommandsWhen working with the Data Format Editor, a virtual cursor is moved along your input data string.  The following commands are used to both move this cursor to different positions, and to select, replace, and insert data into the final output.  For examples that use the Data Format Editor commands, refer to Data Formatter on page 6-16.Send CommandsSend all charactersF1 Include in the output message all of the characters from the input message, starting from current cursor position, followed by an insert character.  Syntax = F1xx where xx stands for the insert character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes. Send a number of charactersF2 Include in the output message a number of characters followed by an insert character.  Start from the current cursor position and continue for “nn” characters or through the last character in the input message, followed by character “xx.”  Syntax = F2nnxx where nn stands for the numeric value (00-99) for the number of characters, and xx stands for the insert character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.Terminal ID TableTerminal Model(s) Terminal IDUSB PC keyboard (HID) 124Mac Keyboard 125PC Keyboard (Japanese) 134Serial (COM driver required) 130HID POS 131USB SurePOS Handheld  128USB SurePOS Tabletop  129Serial RS232 TTL 000RS232 True 000RS485 (IBM-HHBCR 1+2, 46xx) 051Keyboard  PS2 compatibles 003AT compat i bles 002
6 - 5F2 Example:  Send a number of charactersSend the first 10 characters from the bar code above, followed by a carriage return.  Command string:  F2100DF2 is the “Send a number of characters” command10 is the number of characters to send0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  1234567890F2 and F1 Example:  Split characters into 2 linesSend the first 10 characters from the bar code above, followed by a carriage return, followed by the rest of the characters.  Command string:  F2100DF10DF2 is the “Send a number of characters” command10 is the number of characters to send for the first line0D is the hex value for a CRF1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  1234567890ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>Send all characters up to a particular characterF3 Include in the output message all characters from the input message, starting with the character at the current cursor position and continuing to, but not including, the search character “ss,” followed by an insert character.  The cursor is moved forward to the “ss” character.  Syntax = F3ssxx where ss stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code, and xx stands for the insert character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.F3 Example:  Send all characters up to a particular characterUsing the bar code above, send all characters up to but not including “D,” followed by a carriage return.Command string:  F3440DF3 is the “Send all characters up to a particular character” command
6 - 644 is the hex value for a 'D”0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  1234567890ABC<CR>Send all characters up to a stringB9 Include in the output message all characters from the input message, starting with the character at the current cursor position and continuing to, but not including, the search string “s...s.”  The cursor is moved forward to the beginning of the “s...s” string.  Syntax = B9nnnns...s where nnnn stands for the length of the string, and s...s stands for the string to be matched.  The string is made up of hex values for the characters in the string. Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.B9 Example:  Send all characters up to a defined stringUsing the bar code above, send all characters up to but not including “AB.”Command string:  B900024142B9 is the “Send all characters up to a string” command0002 is the length of the string (2 characters)41 is the hex value for A42 is the hex value for BThe data is output as:  1234567890Send all but the last charactersE9 Include in the output message all but the last “nn” characters, starting from the current cursor position.  The cursor is moved forward to one position past the last input message character included.  Syntax = E9nn where nn stands for the numeric value (00-99) for the number of characters that will not be sent at the end of the message.   Insert a character multiple timesF4 Send “xx” character “nn” times in the output message, leaving the cursor in the current position.  Syntax = F4xxnn where xx stands for the insert character’s hex value for its ASCII code, and nn is the numeric value (00-99) for the number of times it should be sent.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.
6 - 7E9 and F4 Example:  Send all but the last characters, followed by 2 tabsSend all characters except for the last 8 from the bar code above, fol-lowed by 2 tabs.  Command string:  E908F40902E9 is the “Send all but the last characters” command08 is the number of characters at the end to ignoreF4 is the “Insert a character multiple times” command09 is the hex value for a horizontal tab02 is the number of times the tab character is sentThe data is output as:  1234567890AB <tab><tab>Insert a stringBA Send “ss” string of “nn” length in the output message, leaving the cursor in the current position.  Syntax = BAnnnns...s where nnnn stands for the length of the string, and s...s stands for the string.  The string is made up of hex values for the characters in the string.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.B9 and BA Example:  Look for the string “AB” and insert 2 asterisks (**) Using the bar code above, send all characters up to but not including “AB.”  Insert 2 asterisks at that point, and send the rest of the data with a carriage return after.Command string:  B900024142BA00022A2AF10DB9 is the “Send all characters up to a string” command0002 is the length of the string (2 characters)41 is the hex value for A42 is the hex value for BBA is the “Insert a string” command0002 is the length of the string to be added (2 characters)2A is the hex value for an asterisk (*)2A is the hex value for an asterisk (*)
6 - 8F1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  1234567890**ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>Insert symbology nameB3 Insert the name of the bar code’s symbology in the output message, without moving the cursor.  Only symbologies with a Honeywell ID are included (see Symbology Charts on page A-1).  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.Insert bar code lengthB4 Insert the bar code’s length in the output message, without moving the cursor.  The length is expressed as a numeric string and does not include leading zeroes.B3 and B4 Example:  Insert the symbology name and lengthSend the symbology name and length before the bar code data from the bar code above.  Break up these insertions with spaces.  End with a carriage return.  Command string:  B3F42001B4F42001F10DB3 is the “Insert symbology name” commandF4 is the “Insert a character multiple times” command20 is the hex value for a space01 is the number of times the space character is sentB4 is the “Insert bar code length” commandF4 is the “Insert a character multiple times” command20 is the hex value for a space01 is the number of times the space character is sentF1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  Code128 20 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>
6 - 9Insert key strokesB5 Insert a key stroke or combination of key strokes.  Key strokes are dependent on your keyboard (see Unicode Key Maps on page A-13).  Any key can be inserted, including arrows and functions.  Syntax = B5xxssnn where xx is the number of keys pressed (without key modifiers), ss is the key modifier from the table below, and nn is the key number from the Unicode Key Maps, page A-13.For example, B501021F inserts an “A” on a 104 key, U.S. style keyboard.  B5 = the command, 01 = number of keys pressed (without the key modifier), 02 is the key modifier for Shift Right, and 1F is the “a” key.  If a lower case “a” were to be inserted, B501001F would be entered.If there are three keystrokes, the syntax would change from B5xxssnn for one keystroke to B5xxssnnssnnssnn.  An example that would insert "abc" is as follows:  B503001F00320030F833.Note: Key modifiers can be added together when needed.  Example:  Control Left+Shift Left = 11. Move CommandsMove the cursor forward a number of charactersF5 Move the cursor ahead “nn” characters from current cursor position.  Syntax = F5nn  where nn is the numeric value (00-99) for the number of characters the cursor should be moved ahead.  F5 Example:  Move the cursor forward and send the dataMove the cursor forward 3 characters, then send the rest of the bar code data from the bar code above.  End with a carriage return.  Command string:  F503F10DF5 is the “Move the cursor forward a number of characters” command03 is the number of characters to move the cursorKey ModifiersNo Key Modifier 00Shift Left 01Shift Right 02Alt Left 04Alt Right 08Control Left 10Control Right 20
6 - 10F1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  4567890ABCDEFGHIJ<CR>Move the cursor backward a number of charactersF6 Move the cursor back “nn” characters from current cursor position.  Syntax = F6nn  where nn is the numeric value (00-99) for the number of characters the cursor should be moved back. Move the cursor to the beginningF7 Move the cursor to the first character in the input message.  Syntax = F7.FE and F7 Example:  Manipulate bar codes that begin with a 1Search for bar codes that begin with a 1.  If a bar code matches, move the cursor back to the beginning of the data and send 6 characters fol-lowed by a carriage return.  Using the bar code above:Command string:  FE31F7F2060DFE is the “Compare characters” command31 is the hex value for 1F7 is the “Move the cursor to the beginning” commandF2 is the “Send a number of characters” command06 is the number of characters to send0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  123456<CR>Move the cursor to the endEA Move the cursor to the last character in the input message.  Syntax = EA.Search CommandsSearch forward for a characterF8 Search the input message forward for “xx” character from the current cursor position, leaving the cursor pointing to the “xx” character.  Syntax = F8xx  where xx stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.
6 - 11F8 Example:  Send bar code data that starts after a particular characterSearch for the letter “D” in bar codes and send all the data that follows, including the “D.”  Using the bar code above:Command string:  F844F10DF8 is the “Search forward for a character” command44 is the hex value for “D”F1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  DEFGHIJ<CR>Search backward for a characterF9 Search the input message backward for “xx” character from the current cursor position, leaving the cursor pointing to the “xx” character.  Syntax = F9xx where xx stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.Search forward for a stringB0 Search forward for “s” string from the current cursor position, leaving cursor pointing to “s” string.  Syntax = B0nnnnS where nnnn is the string length (up to 9999), and S consists of the ASCII hex value of each character in the match string.  For example, B0000454657374 will search forward for the first occurrence of the 4 character string “Test.”Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.B0 Example:  Send bar code data that starts after a string of char-actersSearch for the letters “FGH” in bar codes and send all the data that fol-lows, including “FGH.”  Using the bar code above:Command string:  B00003464748F10DB0 is the “Search forward for a string” command0003 is the string length (3 characters)46 is the hex value for “F”47 is the hex value for “G”
6 - 1248 is the hex value for “H”F1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  FGHIJ<CR>Search backward for a stringB1 Search backward for “s” string from the current cursor position, leaving cursor pointing to “s” string.  Syntax = B1nnnnS where nnnn is the string length (up to 9999), and S consists of the ASCII hex value of each character in the match string.  For example, B1000454657374 will search backward for the first occurrence of the 4 character string “Test.”Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.Search forward for a non-matching characterE6 Search the input message forward for the first non-“xx” character from the current cursor position, leaving the cursor pointing to the non-“xx” character.  Syntax = E6xx  where xx stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.E6 Example:  Remove zeroes at the beginning of bar code dataThis example shows a bar code that has been zero filled.  You may want to ignore the zeroes and send all the data that follows.  E6 searches forward for the first character that is not zero, then sends all the data after, followed by a carriage return.  Using the bar code above:Command string:  E630F10DE6 is the “Search forward for a non-matching character” command30 is the hex value for 0F1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  37692<CR>Search backward for a non-matching characterE7 Search the input message backward for the first non-“xx” character from the current cursor position, leaving the cursor pointing to the non-“xx” character.  Syntax = E7xx  where xx stands for the search character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.
6 - 13Miscellaneous CommandsSuppress charactersFB Suppress all occurrences of up to 15 different characters, starting at the current cursor position, as the cursor is advanced by other commands.  When the FC command is encountered, the suppress function is terminated.  The cursor is not moved by the FB command.  Syntax = FBnnxxyy . .zz where nn is a count of the number of suppressed characters in the list, and xxyy .. zz is the list of characters to be suppressed. FB Example:  Remove spaces in bar code dataThis example shows a bar code that has spaces in the data.  You may want to remove the spaces before sending the data.  Using the bar code above:Command string:  FB0120F10DFB is the “Suppress characters” command01 is the number of character types to be suppressed20 is the hex value for a spaceF1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  34567890<CR>Stop suppressing charactersFC Disables suppress filter and clear all suppressed characters.  Syntax = FC.Replace charactersE4 Replaces up to 15 characters in the output message, without moving the cursor.  Replacement continues until the E5 command is encountered.  Syntax = E4nnxx1xx2yy1yy2...zz1zz2 where nn is the total count of the number of characters in the list (characters to be replaced plus replacement characters); xx1 defines characters to be replaced and xx2 defines replacement characters, continuing through zz1 and zz2.E4 Example:  Replace zeroes with CRs in bar code data
6 - 14If the bar code has characters that the host application does not want included, you can use the E4 command to replace those characters with something else.  In this example, you will replace the zeroes in the bar code above with carriage returns.Command string:  E402300DF10DE4 is the “Replace characters” command02 is the total count of characters to be replaced, plus the replacement characters (0 is replaced by CR, so total characters = 2)30 is the hex value for 00D is the hex value for a CR (the character that will replace the 0)F1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRThe data is output as:  12345678ABC<CR>Stop replacing charactersE5 Terminates character replacement.  Syntax = E5.Compare charactersFE Compare the character in the current cursor position to the character “xx.”  If characters are equal, move the cursor forward one position.   Syntax = FExx  where xx stands for the comparison character’s hex value for its ASCII code.  Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.Compare stringB2 Compare the string in the input message to the string “s.”  If the strings are equal, move the cursor forward past the end of the string.  Syntax = B2nnnnS  where nnnn is the string length (up to 9999), and S consists of the ASCII hex value of each character in the match string.  For example, B2000454657374 will compare the string at the current cursor position with the 4 character string “Test.” Refer to the ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252), beginning on page A-4 for decimal, hex and character codes.Check for a numberEC Check to make sure there is an ASCII number at the current cursor position.  The format is aborted if the character is not numeric. EC Example:  Only output the data if the bar code begins with a numberIf you will only accept data from bar codes that begin with a number, you can use EC to check for the number.Command string:  ECF10D
6 - 15EC is the “Check for a number” commandF1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRIf this bar code is read,    the format fails.  If this bar code is read:  the data is output as:  1234AB<CR>Check for non-numeric characterED Check to make sure there is a non-numeric ASCII character at the current cursor position.  The format is aborted if the character is numeric. ED Example:  Only output the data if the bar code begins with a letterIf you will only accept data from bar codes that begin with a letter, you can use ED to check for the number.Command string:  EDF10DED is the “Check for a non-numeric character” commandF1 is the “Send all characters” command0D is the hex value for a CRIf this bar code is read,    the format fails.  If this bar code is read:  the data is output as:  AB1234<CR>Insert a delayEF Inserts a delay of up to 49,995 milliseconds (in multiples of 5), starting from the current cursor position. Syntax = EFnnnn where nnnn stands for the delay in 5ms increments, up to 9999.  This command can only be used with keyboard emulation.
6 - 16Discard DataB8 Discards types of data.  For example, you may want to discard Code 128 bar codes that begin with the letter A.  In step 4 (page 6-2), select 6A (for Code 128), and in step 5, select 9999 (for all lengths).  Enter FE41B8 to compare and discard Code 128 bar codes that begin with the letter A.  Syntax = B8.  Note: The B8 command must be entered after all other commands.   The Data Format must be Required (see page 6-16) in order for the B8 command to work.  If Data Format is On, but Not Required (page 6-17), bar code data that meets the B8 format is scanned and output as usual.Other data format settings impact the B8 command.  If Data Format Non-Match Error Tone is On (page 6-18), the scanner emits an error tone.  If Data format Non-Match Error Tone is Off, the code is disabled for reading and no tone is sounded.   Data FormatterWhen Data Formatter is turned Off, the bar code data is output to the host as read, including prefixes and suffixes. You may wish to require the data to conform to a data format you have created and saved.  The following settings can be applied to your data format:Data Formatter On, Not Required, Keep Prefix/SuffixScanned data is modified according to your data format, and prefixes and suffixes are transmitted.Data Formatter On, Not Required, Drop Prefix/SuffixScanned data is modified according to your data format.  If a data format is found for a particular symbol, those prefixes and suffixes are not transmitted.  If a data format is not found for that symbol, the prefixes and suffixes are transmitted.Data Format Required, Keep Prefix/SuffixScanned data is modified according to your data format, and prefixes and suffixes are transmitted.  Any data that does not match your data format requirements generates an error tone and the data in that bar code is not transmitted.  If you wish to process this type of bar code without generating an error tone, see Data Format Non-Match Error Tone.Data Format Required, Drop Prefix/SuffixScanned data is modified according to your data format.  If a data format is found for a particular symbol, those prefixes and suffixes are not transmitted.  Any data that does not match your data format requirements generates an error tone.  If you wish to process this type of bar code without generating an error tone, see Data Format Non-Match Error Tone.Data Formatter Off
6 - 17Choose one of the following options.  Default = Data Formatter On, Not Required, Keep Prefix/Suffix.Data Format Non-Match Error ToneWhen a bar code is encountered that doesn’t match your required data for-mat, the scanner normally generates an error tone.  However, you may want to continue scanning bar codes without hearing the error tone.  If you scan the Data Format Non-Match Error Tone Off bar code, data that doesn’t conform to your data format is not transmitted, and no error tone * Data Formatter On,Not Required, Keep Prefix/SuffixData Formatter On,Not Required, Drop Prefix/SuffixData Format Required,Keep Prefix/SuffixData Format Required,Drop Prefix/Suffix
6 - 18will sound.  If you wish to hear the error tone when a non-matching bar code is found, scan the Data Format Non-Match Error Tone On bar code.  Default = Data Format Non-Match Error Tone On.Primary/Alternate Data FormatsYou can save up to four data formats, and switch between these formats.  Your primary data format is saved under 0.  Your other three formats are saved under 1, 2, and 3.  To set your device to use one of these formats, scan one of the bar codes below.Single Scan Data Format ChangeYou can also switch between data formats for a single scan.  The next bar code is scanned using an alternate data format, then reverts to the format you have selected above (either Primary, 1, 2, or 3).* Data Format Non-Match Error Tone OnData Format Non-Match Error Tone OffPrimary Data FormatData Format 1Data Format 2Data Format 3
6 - 19For example, you may have set your device to the data format you saved as Data Format 3.  You can switch to Data Format 1 for a single trigger pull by scanning the Single Scan-Data Format 1 bar code below.  The next bar code that is scanned uses Data Format 1, then reverts back to Data Format 3. Single Scan-Primary Data FormatSingle Scan-Data Format 1Single Scan-Data Format 2Single Scan-Data Format 3
6 - 20
7 - 17SymbologiesThis programming section contains the following menu selections.  Refer to Chapter 11 for settings and defaults.• All Symbologies • Interleaved 2 of 5• Aztec Code • Korea Post• China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) • Matrix 2 of 5• Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) Code • MaxiCode• Codabar • MicroPDF417• Codablock A • MSI• Codablock F • NEC 2 of 5• Code 11 • Postal Codes - 2D• Code 128 • Postal Codes - Linear• Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF) • PDF417• Code 39 • GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional• Code 93 • QR Code•Data Matrix • Straight 2 of 5 IATA (two-bar start/stop)•EAN/JAN-13 • Straight 2 of 5 Industrial (three-bar start/stop)• EAN/JAN-8 • TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39)• GS1 Composite Codes • Telepen• GS1 DataBar Expanded • Trioptic Code• GS1 DataBar Limited • UPC-A• GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional • UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code• GS1 Emulation • UPC-E0• GS1-128 • UPC-E1
7 - 2All SymbologiesIf you want to decode all the symbologies allowable for your scanner, scan the All Symbologies On code.  If on the other hand, you want to decode only a particular symbology, scan All Symbologies Off followed by the On symbol for that particular symbology.  Note: When All Symbologies On is scanned, 2D Postal Codes are not enabled.  2D Postal Codes must be enabled separately.Message Length DescriptionYou are able to set the valid reading length of some of the bar code symbolo-gies.   If the data length of the scanned bar code doesn’t match the valid read-ing length, the scanner will issue an error tone.  You may wish to set the same value for minimum and maximum length to force the scanner to read fixed length bar code data.  This helps reduce the chances of a misread.EXAMPLE: Decode only those bar codes with a count of 9-20 characters.Min. length = 09Max. length = 20EXAMPLE: Decode only those bar codes with a count of 15 characters.Min. length = 15Max. length = 15For a value other than the minimum and maximum message length defaults, scan the bar codes included in the explanation of the symbology, then scan the digit value of the message length and Save bar codes on the Programming Chart inside the back cover of this manual.  The minimum and maximum lengths and the defaults are included with the respective symbologies.All Symbologies OnAll Symbologies Off
7 - 3Codabar<Default All Codabar Settings>Codabar On/OffCodabar Start/Stop CharactersStart/Stop characters identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code. You may either transmit, or not transmit Start/Stop characters.  Default = Don’t Transmit.Codabar Check CharacterCodabar check characters are created using different “modulos.”  You can program the scanner to read only Codabar bar codes with Modulo 16 check characters.  Default = No Check Character.No Check Character indicates that the scanner reads and transmits bar code data with or without a check character.When Check Character is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner will only read Codabar bar codes printed with a check character, and will trans-mit this character at the end of the scanned data.* OnOffTransmit* Don’t Transmit
7 - 4When Check Character is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit will only read Codabar bar codes printed with a check character, but will not transmit the check character with the scanned data.Codabar ConcatenationCodabar supports symbol concatenation.  When you enable concatena-tion, the scanner looks for a Codabar symbol having a “D” start character, adjacent to a symbol having a “D” stop character.  In this case the two mes-sages are concatenated into one with the “D” characters omitted. Select Require to prevent the scanner from decoding a single “D” Codabar symbol without its companion.  This selection has no effect on Codabar symbols without Stop/Start D characters.* No Check CharacterValidate Modulo 16 and TransmitValidate Modulo 16, butDon’t TransmitA12 34DD5 6 7 8 AOn* OffRequire
7 - 5Codabar Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 2-60.  Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 60.Minimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 6Code 39< Default All Code 39 Settings >Code 39 On/OffCode 39 Start/Stop CharactersStart/Stop characters identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code. You may either transmit, or not transmit Start/Stop characters.  Default =  Don’t Transmit.Code 39 Check CharacterNo Check Character indicates that the scanner reads and transmits bar code data with or without a check character.When Check Character is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit only reads Code 39 bar codes printed with a check character, but will not transmit the check character with the scanned data.  *  OnOffTransmit*  Don’t Transmit
7 - 7When Check Character is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner only reads Code 39 bar codes printed with a check character, and will transmit this character at the end of the scanned data.  Default = No Check Charac-ter.Code 39 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 0-48.  Minimum Default = 0, Maximum Default = 48.Code 39 AppendThis function allows the scanner to append the data from several Code 39 bar codes together before transmitting them to the host computer.  When the scanner encounters a Code 39 bar code with the append trigger char-*  No Check CharacterValidate and TransmitValidate, but Don’t TransmitMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 8acter(s), it buffers Code 39 bar codes until it reads a Code 39 bar code that does not have the append trigger.  The data is then transmitted in the order in which the bar codes were read (FIFO).  Default = Off.Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)Code 32 Pharmaceutical is a form of the Code 39 symbology used by Ital-ian pharmacies.  This symbology is also known as PARAF.Note: Trioptic Code (page 7-41) must be turned off while scanning Code 32 Pharmaceutical codes.*  OffOn*  OffOn
7 - 9Full ASCIIIf Full ASCII Code 39 decoding is enabled, certain character pairs within the bar code symbol will be interpreted as a single character.  For example:  $V will be decoded as the ASCII character SYN, and /C will be decoded as the ASCII character #.  Default = Off.Character pairs /M and /N decode as a minus sign and period respectively.Character pairs /P through /Y decode as 0 through 9.Code 39 Code PageCode pages define the mapping of character codes to characters.  If the data received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because the bar code being scanned was created using a code page that is different from the one the host program is expecting.  If this is the case, scan the bar code below, select the code page with which the bar codes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements on page A-NUL %U DLE $PSP SPACE00@%VPP‘%Wp+PSOH $A DC1 $Q !/A 11AAQQa+Aq+QSTX $B DC2 $R “/B 22BBRRb+Br+RETX $C DC3 $S #/C 33CCSSc+Cs+SEOT $D DC4 $T $/D 44DDTTd+Dt+TENQ $E NAK $U %/E 55EEUUe+Eu+UACK $F SYN $V &/F 66FFVVf+Fv+VBEL $G ETB $W ‘/G77GGWWg+Gw+WBS $H CAN $X (/H 88HHXXh+Hx+XHT $I EM $Y )/I 99IIYYi+Iy+YLF $J SUB $Z */J :/ZJJZZj+Jz+ZVT $K ESC %A +/K ;%FKK[%Kk+K{%PFF $L FS %B ,/L <%GLL\%Ll+L|%QCR $M GS %C -- =%HMM]%Mm+M}%RSO $N RS %D .. >%INN^%Nn+N~%SSI $O US %E //O ?%JOO_%Oo+ODEL %T*  Full ASCII OffFull ASCII On
7 - 1010), and scan the value and the Save bar code from the Programming Chart on the inside the back cover of this manual.  The data characters should then appear properly.Interleaved 2 of 5< Default All Interleaved 2 of 5 Settings >Interleaved 2 of 5 On/OffCheck DigitNo Check Digit indicates that the scanner reads and transmits bar code data with or without a check digit.When Check Digit is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit only reads Interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes printed with a check digit, but will not transmit the check digit with the scanned data.  Code 39 Code Page*  OnOff
7 - 11When Check Digit is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner only reads Interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes printed with a check digit, and will transmit this digit at the end of the scanned data.  Default = No Check Digit.Interleaved 2 of 5 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 2-80.  Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.Validate, but Don’t Transmit* No Check DigitValidate and TransmitMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 12NEC 2 of 5< Default All NEC 2 of 5 Settings >NEC 2 of 5 On/OffCheck DigitNo Check Digit indicates that the scanner reads and transmits bar code data with or without a check digit.When Check Digit is set to Validate, but Don’t Transmit, the unit only reads NEC 2 of 5 bar codes printed with a check digit, but will not transmit the check digit with the scanned data.  When Check Digit is set to Validate and Transmit, the scanner only reads NEC 2 of 5 bar codes printed with a check digit, and will transmit this digit at the end of the scanned data.  Default = No Check Digit.*  OnOff* No Check DigitValidate and TransmitValidate, but Don’t Transmit
7 - 13NEC 2 of 5 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 2-80.  Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.Minimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 14Code 93< Default All Code 93 Settings >Code 93 On/OffCode 93 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 0-80.  Minimum Default = 0, Maximum Default = 80.Code 93 AppendThis function allows the scanner to append the data from several Code 93 bar codes together before transmitting them to the host computer.  When this function is enabled, the scanner stores those Code 93 bar codes that start with a space (excluding the start and stop symbols), and does not immediately transmit the data.  The scanner stores the data in the order in *  OnOffMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 15which the bar codes are read, deleting the first space from each.  The scanner transmits the appended data when it reads a Code 93 bar code that starts with a character other than a space.  Default = Off.Code 93 Code PageCode pages define the mapping of character codes to characters.  If the data received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because the bar code being scanned was created using a  code page that is different from the one the host program is expecting.  If this is the case, scan the bar code below, select the code page with which the bar codes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements on page A-10), and scan the value and the Save bar code from the Programming Chart on the inside the back cover of this manual.  The data characters should then appear properly.*  OffOnCode 93 Code Page
7 - 16Straight 2 of 5 Industrial (three-bar start/stop)<Default All Straight 2 of 5 Industrial Settings>Straight 2 of 5 Industrial On/OffStraight 2 of 5 Industrial Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-48.  Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 48.On*  OffMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 17Straight 2 of 5 IATA (two-bar start/stop)<Default All Straight 2 of 5 IATA Settings>Straight 2 of 5 IATA On/OffStraight 2 of 5 IATA Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-48.  Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 48.*  OffOnMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 18Matrix 2 of 5<Default All Matrix 2 of 5 Settings>Matrix 2 of 5 On/OffMatrix 2 of 5 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-80.  Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.On*  OffMaximum Message LengthMinimum Message Length
7 - 19Code 11<Default All Code 11 Settings>Code 11 On/OffCheck Digits RequiredThis option sets whether 1 or 2 check digits are required with Code 11 bar codes.  Default = Two Check Digits.On*  OffOne Check Digit*  Two Check Digits
7 - 20Code 11 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-80.   Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 80.Code 128<Default All Code 128 Settings>Code 128 On/OffISBT 128 ConcatenationIn 1994 the International Society of Blood Transfusion (ISBT) ratified a standard for communicating critical blood information in a uniform manner.  The use of ISBT formats requires a paid license. The ISBT 128 Application Specification describes 1) the critical data elements for labeling blood prod-ucts, 2) the current recommendation to use Code 128 due to its high degree of security and its space-efficient design, 3) a variation of Code 128 Minimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length*  OnOff
7 - 21that supports concatenation of neighboring symbols, and 4) the standard layout for bar codes on a blood product label.  Use the bar codes below to turn concatenation on or off.  Default =Off.Code 128 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 0-80.   Minimum Default = 0, Maximum Default = 80.Code 128 AppendThis function allows the scanner to append the data from several Code 128 bar codes together before transmitting them to the host computer.  When the scanner encounters a Code 128 bar code with the append trigger char-acter(s), it buffers Code 128 bar codes until it reads a Code 128 bar code that does not have the append trigger.  The data is then transmitted in the order in which the bar codes were read (FIFO).  Default = On.*  OffOnMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message LengthOff* On
7 - 22Code 128 Code PageCode pages define the mapping of character codes to characters.  If the data received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because the bar code being scanned was created using a code page that is different from the one the host program is expecting.  If this is the case, scan the bar code below, select the code page with which the bar codes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements on page A-10), and scan the value and the Save bar code from the Programming Chart on the inside the back cover of this manual.  The data characters should then appear properly.Code 128 Code Page
7 - 23GS1-128<Default All GS1-128 Settings>GS1-128 On/OffGS1-128 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-80.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 80.* OnOffMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 24Telepen<Default All Telepen Settings>Telepen On/OffTelepen OutputUsing AIM Telepen Output, the scanner reads symbols with start/stop pat-tern 1 and decodes them as standard full ASCII (start/stop pattern 1).  When Original Telepen Output is selected, the scanner reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and decodes them as compressed numeric with optional full ASCII (start/stop pattern 2).  Default = AIM Telepen Output.On*  OffOriginal Telepen Output*  AIM Telepen Output
7 - 25Telepen Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-60.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 60.UPC-A<Default All UPC-A Settings>UPC-A On/OffNote: To convert UPC-A bar codes to EAN-13, see Convert UPC-A to EAN-13 on page 7-32.Minimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length*  OnOff
7 - 26UPC-A Check DigitThis selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of the scanned data or not.  Default = On.UPC-A Number SystemThe numeric system digit of a U.P.C. symbol is normally transmitted at the beginning of the scanned data, but the unit can be programmed so it will not transmit it.   Default = On.UPC-A AddendaThis selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned UPC-A data.Default = Off for both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.*  OnOffOff*  On* 5 Digit Addenda Off5 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off2 Digit Addenda On
7 - 27UPC-A Addenda RequiredWhen Required is scanned, the scanner will only read UPC-A bar codes that have addenda.  You must then turn on a 2 or 5 digit addenda listed on page 7-26.  Default = Not Required.UPC-A Addenda SeparatorWhen this feature is on, there is a space between the data from the bar code and the data from the addenda.  When turned off, there is no space.  Default = On.UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon CodeUse the following codes to enable or disable UPC-A and EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code.  When left on the default setting (Off), the scanner treats Cou-pon Codes and Extended Coupon Codes as single bar codes.  If you scan the Allow Concatenation code, when the scanner sees the coupon code and the extended coupon code in a single scan, it transmits both as sepa-rate symbologies.  Otherwise, it transmits the first coupon code it reads.  If you scan the Require Concatenation code, the scanner must see and read the coupon code and extended coupon code in a single read to transmit the data.  No data is output unless both codes are read. *  Not RequiredRequiredOff*  On
7 - 28Default = Off.Coupon GS1 DataBar OutputIf you scan coupons that have both UPC and GS1 DataBar codes, you may wish to scan and output only the data from the GS1 DataBar code.  Scan the GS1 Output On code below to scan and output only the GS1 DataBar code data.  Default = GS1 Output Off.Allow Concatenation* OffRequire Concatenation* GS1 Output OffGS1 Output On
7 - 29UPC-E0<Default All UPC-E Settings>UPC-E0 On/OffMost U.P.C. bar codes lead with the 0 number system.  To read these codes, use the UPC-E0 On selection.  If you need to read codes that lead with the 1 number system, use UPC-E1 (page 7-31).  Default = On.UPC-E0 ExpandUPC-E Expand expands the UPC-E code to the 12 digit, UPC-A format.  Default = Off.*  UPC-E0 OnUPC-E0 OffOn*  Off
7 - 30UPC-E0 Addenda RequiredWhen Required is scanned, the scanner will only read UPC-E bar codes that have addenda.  Default = Not Required.UPC-E0 Addenda SeparatorWhen this feature is On, there is a space between the data from the bar code and the data from the addenda.  When turned Off, there is no space.  Default = On.UPC-E0 Check DigitCheck Digit specifies whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of the scanned data or not.  Default = On.*  Not RequiredRequiredOff*  OnOff*  On
7 - 31UPC-E0 Leading ZeroThis feature allows the transmission of a leading zero (0) at the beginning of scanned data.  To prevent transmission, scan Off.  Default = On.UPC-E0 AddendaThis selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned UPC-E data.Default = Off for both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.UPC-E1Most U.P.C. bar codes lead with the 0 number system.  For these codes, use UPC-E0 (page 7-29).  If you need to read codes that lead with the 1 number system, use the UPC-E1 On selection.  Default = Off.Off*  On* 5 Digit Addenda Off5 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off2 Digit Addenda OnUPC-E1 On* UPC-E1 Off
7 - 32EAN/JAN-13<Default All EAN/JAN Settings>EAN/JAN-13 On/OffConvert UPC-A to EAN-13When UPC-A Converted to EAN-13 is selected, UPC-A bar codes are converted to 13 digit EAN-13 codes by adding a zero to the front.  When Do not Convert UPC-A is selected, UPC-A codes are read as UPC-A.*  OnOff* Do not Convert  UPC-AUPC-A Converted to EAN-13
7 - 33EAN/JAN-13 Check DigitThis selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of the scanned data or not.  Default = On.EAN/JAN-13 AddendaThis selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned EAN/JAN-13 data.  Default = Off for both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.EAN/JAN-13 Addenda RequiredWhen Required is scanned, the scanner will only read EAN/JAN-13 bar codes that have addenda.  Default = Not Required.Off*  On* 5 Digit Addenda Off5 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off2 Digit Addenda On*  Not RequiredRequired
7 - 34EAN/JAN-13 Addenda SeparatorWhen this feature is On, there is a space between the data from the bar code and the data from the addenda.  When turned Off, there is no space.  Default = On.Note: If you want to enable or disable EAN13 with Extended Coupon Code, refer to UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code (page 7-27).ISBN TranslateWhen On is scanned, EAN-13 Bookland symbols are translated into their equivalent ISBN number format. Default = Off.Off*  On*  OffOn
7 - 35EAN/JAN-8<Default All EAN/JAN-8 Settings>EAN/JAN-8 On/OffEAN/JAN-8 Check DigitThis selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of the scanned data or not.  Default = On.*  OnOffOff*  On
7 - 36EAN/JAN-8 AddendaThis selection adds 2 or 5 digits to the end of all scanned EAN/JAN-8 data.Default = Off for both 2 Digit and 5 Digit Addenda.EAN/JAN-8 Addenda RequiredWhen Required is scanned, the scanner will only read EAN/JAN-8 bar codes that have addenda.  Default = Not Required.EAN/JAN-8 Addenda SeparatorWhen this feature is On, there is a space between the data from the bar code and the data from the addenda.  When turned Off, there is no space.  Default = On.* 5 Digit Addenda Off5 Digit Addenda On* 2 Digit Addenda Off2 Digit Addenda On*  Not RequiredRequiredOff*  On
7 - 37MSI<Default All MSI Settings>MSI On/OffMSI Check CharacterDifferent types of check characters are used with MSI bar codes.  You can program the scanner to read MSI bar codes with Type 10 check characters.  Default = Validate Type 10, but Don’t Transmit.When Check Character is set to Validate Type 10/11 and Transmit, the scanner will only read MSI bar codes printed with the specified type check character(s), and will transmit the character(s) at the end of the scanned data.On* Off
7 - 38When Check Character is set to Validate Type 10/11, but Don’t Transmit, the unit will only read MSI bar codes printed with the specified type check character(s), but will not transmit the check character(s) with the scanned data.MSI Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 4-48.   Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 48.Validate Type 10 and Transmit*  Validate Type 10, but Don’t TransmitValidate 2 Type 10 Characters, but Don’t TransmitValidate 2 Type 10 Characters and TransmitValidate Type 10 then Type 11 Character, but Don’t TransmitValidate Type 10 then Type 11 Character and TransmitDisable MSI Check CharactersMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 39GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional< Default All GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional Settings >GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional On/OffGS1 DataBar Limited< Default All GS1 DataBar Limited Settings >GS1 DataBar Limited On/Off* OnOff* OnOff
7 - 40GS1 DataBar Expanded< Default All GS1 DataBar Expanded Settings >GS1 DataBar Expanded On/OffGS1 DataBar Expanded Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 4-74.   Minimum Default = 4, Maximum Default = 74.* OnOffMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 41Trioptic CodeNote: If you are going to scan Code 32 Pharmaceutical codes (page 7-8), Trioptic Code must be off.Trioptic Code is used for labeling magnetic storage media.Codablock A<Default All Codablock A Settings>Codablock A On/OffOn* OffOn* Off
7 - 42Codablock A Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-600.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 600.Minimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 43Codablock F<Default All Codablock F Settings>Codablock F On/OffCodablock F Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-2048.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 2048.On* OffMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 44PDF417< Default All PDF417 Settings >PDF417 On/OffPDF417 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-2750.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 2750.* OnOffMaximum  Message Length Minimum Message Length
7 - 45MacroPDF417MacroPDF417 is an implementation of PDF417 capable of encoding very large amounts of data into multiple PDF417 bar codes.  When this selection is enabled, these multiple bar codes are assembled into a single data string.  Default = On. MicroPDF417< Default All MicroPDF417 Settings >MicroPDF417 On/Off* OnOff* OffOn
7 - 46MicroPDF417 Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-366.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 366.GS1 Composite CodesLinear codes are combined with a unique 2D composite component to form a new class called GS1 Composite symbology.  GS1 Composite symbologies allow for the co-existence of symbologies already in use.  Default = Off.UPC/EAN VersionScan the UPC/EAN Version On bar code to decode GS1 Composite sym-bols that have a U.P.C. or an EAN linear component.  (This does not affect GS1 Composite symbols with a GS1-128 or GS1 linear component.)  Default = UPC/EAN Version Off.Note: If you scan coupons that have both UPC and GS1 DataBar codes, you may wish to scan and output only the data from the GS1 DataBar code.  See Coupon GS1 DataBar Output (page 7-28) for further information.Maximum  Message LengthMinimum Message LengthOn* OffUPC/EAN Version On*  UPC/EAN Version Off
7 - 47GS1 Composite Code Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-2435.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 2435.GS1 EmulationThe scanner can automatically format the output from any GS1 data carrier to emulate what would be encoded in an equivalent GS1-128 or GS1 DataBar  symbol.  GS1 data carriers include UPC-A and UPC-E, EAN-13 and EAN-8, ITF-14, GS1-128, and GS1-128 DataBar and GS1 Composites.  (Any applica-tion that accepts GS1 data can be simplified since it only needs to recognize one data carrier type.)If GS1-128 Emulation is scanned, all retail codes (U.P.C., UPC-E, EAN8, EAN13) are expanded out to 16 digits.  If the AIM ID is enabled, the value will be the GS1-128 AIM ID, ]C1 (see Symbology Charts on page A-1).If GS1 DataBar Emulation is scanned, all retail codes (U.P.C., UPC-E, EAN8, EAN13) are expanded out to 16 digits.  If the AIM ID is enabled, the value will be the GS1-DataBar AIM ID, ]em (see Symbology Charts on page A-1).If GS1 Code Expansion Off is scanned, retail code expansion is disabled, and UPC-E expansion is controlled by the UPC-E0 Expand (page 7-29) setting.  If the AIM ID is enabled, the value will be the GS1-128 AIM ID, ]C1 (see Symbology Charts on page A-1).If EAN8 to EAN13 Conversion is scanned, all EAN8 bar codes are converted to EAN13 format.  Maximum  Message LengthMinimum Message Length
7 - 48Default = GS1 Emulation Off.TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39)This code is a composite code since it has a Code 39 linear component and a MicroPDF417 stacked code component.  All bar code readers are capable of reading the Code 39 linear component.  The MicroPDF417 component can only be decoded if TLC39 On is selected.  The linear component may be decoded as Code 39 even if TLC39 is off.  Default = Off.  GS1 DataBar EmulationGS1-128 Emulation* GS1 Emulation OffGS1 Code Expansion OffEAN8 to EAN13 Conversion* OffOn
7 - 49QR Code< Default All QR Code Settings >QR Code On/OffThis selection applies to both QR Code and Micro QR Code.QR Code Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-7089.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 7089.QR Code AppendThis function allows the scanner to append the data from several QR Code bar codes together before transmitting them to the host computer.  When the scanner encounters an QR Code bar code with the append trigger character(s), it buffers the number of QR Code bar codes determined by * OnOffMaximum  Message LengthMinimum Message Length
7 - 50information encoded in those bar codes.  Once the proper number of codes is reached, the data is output in the order specified in the bar codes.  Default = On.QR Code PageQR Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters.  If the data received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because the bar code being scanned was created using a  code page that is different from the one the host program is expecting.  If this is the case, scan the bar code below, select the code page with which the bar codes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements on page A-10), and scan the value and the Save bar code from the Programming Chart on the inside the back cover of this manual.  The data characters should then appear properly.Off* OnQR Code Page
7 - 51Data Matrix< Default All Data Matrix Settings >Data Matrix On/OffData Matrix Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-3116.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 3116.Data Matrix AppendThis function allows the scanner to append the data from several Data Matrix bar codes together before transmitting them to the host computer.  When the scanner encounters an Data Matrix bar code with the append trigger character(s), it buffers the number of Data Matrix bar codes deter-Off* OnMaximum  Message LengthMinimum Message Length
7 - 52mined by information encoded in those bar codes.  Once the proper num-ber of codes is reached, the data is output in the order specified in the bar codes.  Default = On.Data Matrix Code PageData Matrix Code pages define the mapping of character codes to charac-ters.  If the data received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because the bar code being scanned was created using a code page that is different from the one the host program is expecting.  If this is the case, scan the bar code below, select the code page with which the bar codes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements on page A-10), and scan the value and the Save bar code from the Programming Chart on the inside the back cover of this manual.  The data characters should then appear properly.Off* OnData Matrix Code Page
7 - 53MaxiCode< Default All MaxiCode Settings >MaxiCode On/OffMaxiCode Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-150.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 150.On* OffMaximum  Message LengthMinimum Message Length
7 - 54Aztec Code< Default All Aztec Code Settings >Aztec Code On/OffAztec Code Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-3832.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 3832.Aztec AppendThis function allows the scanner to append the data from several Aztec bar codes together before transmitting them to the host computer.  When the scanner encounters an Aztec bar code with the append trigger charac-Off* OnMaximum  Message LengthMinimum Message Length
7 - 55ter(s), it buffers the number of Aztec bar codes determined by information encoded in those bar codes.  Once the proper number of codes is reached, the data is output in the order specified in the bar codes.  Default = On.Aztec Code PageAztec Code pages define the mapping of character codes to characters.  If the data received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because the bar code being scanned was created using a  code page that is different from the one the host program is expecting.  If this is the case, scan the bar code below, select the code page with which the bar codes were created (see ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character Replacements on page A-10), and scan the value and the Save bar code from the Programming Chart on the inside the back cover of this manual.  The data characters should then appear properly.Off* OnAztec Code Page
7 - 56Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) Code< Default All Han Xin Settings >Han Xin Code On/OffHan Xin Code Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Mini-mum and Maximum lengths = 1-7833.   Minimum Default = 1, Maximum Default = 7833.* OffOnMaximum  Message LengthMinimum Message Length
7 - 57Postal Codes - 2DThe following lists the possible 2D postal codes, and 2D postal code combina-tions that are allowed.  Only one 2D postal code selection can be active at a time.  If you scan a second 2D postal code selection, the first selection is over-written.  Default = 2D Postal Codes Off.Single 2D Postal Codes:* 2D Postal Codes OffAustralian Post OnJapanese Post OnKIX Post OnPlanet Code OnBritish Post OnAlso see Planet Code Check Digit, page 7-60.Canadian Post OnIntelligent Mail Bar Code OnPostal-4i On
7 - 58Combination 2D Postal Codes:Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnInfoMail OnPostnet OnAlso see Postnet Check Digit, page 7-60.Planet Code and Postnet OnPostnet and Postal-4i OnPostnet and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPostal-4i and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPlanet Code and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPostal-4i and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnIntelligent Mail Bar Code and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnInfoMail and British Post  On
7 - 59Planet Code, Postal-4i, and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPostnet, Postal-4i, and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPlanet Code, Postal-4i, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPlanet Code, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPostal-4i, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPlanet Code, Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet  OnPlanet Code, Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPlanet Code, Postnet, and Postal-4i OnPlanet Code, Postnet, and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPlanet Code and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPlanet Code and Postal-4i On
7 - 60Planet Code Check DigitThis selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of Planet Code data.  Default = Don’t Transmit.Postnet Check DigitThis selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of Postnet data.  Default = Don’t Transmit.Australian Post InterpretationThis option controls what interpretation is applied to customer fields in Aus-tralian 4-State symbols.  Bar Output lists the bar patterns in “0123” format.  Numeric N Table causes that field to be interpreted as numeric data using the N Table.  Alphanumeric C Table causes the field to be interpreted as alphanumeric data using the C Table.  Refer to the Australian Post Specification Tables.Combination C and N Tables causes the field to be interpreted using either the C or N Tables.* Don’t Transmit Check DigitTransmit Check Digit* Don’t Transmit Check DigitTransmit Check Digit
7 - 61Postal Codes - LinearThe following lists linear postal codes.  Any combination of linear postal code selections can be active at a time.  China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)<Default All China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) Settings>Numeric N Table*  Bar OutputAlphanumeric C TableCombination C and N Tables
7 - 62China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) On/OffChina Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Minimum and Maximum lengths = 2-80.   Minimum Default = 4, Maxi-mum Default = 80.On* OffMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length
7 - 63Korea Post<Default All Korea Post Settings>Korea PostKorea Post Message LengthScan the bar codes below to change the message length.  Refer to Message Length Description (page 7-2) for additional information.  Minimum and Maximum lengths = 2-80.   Minimum Default = 4, Maxi-mum Default = 48.Korea Post Check DigitThis selection allows you to specify whether the check digit should be transmitted at the end of the scanned data.  Default = Don’t Transmit.On* OffMinimum Message LengthMaximum Message Length* Don’t Transmit Check DigitTransmit Check Digit
7 - 64
8 - 18Imaging CommandsThe scanner is like a digital camera in the way it captures, manipulates, and transfers images.  The following commands allow you to alter the way the scan-ner performs these functions.Note: If you are using the scanner in a stand, you must set the In-Stand Sensor Mode to Off in order to take images (see In-Stand Sensor Mode on page 4-14).Single-Use BasisImaging Commands with their modifiers send instructions to the scanner on a single-use basis, and take effect for a single image capture.  Once that capture is complete, the scanner reverts to its imaging default settings.  If you want to permanently change a setting, you must use the serial default commands (see Chapter 11).  When the serial default command is used, that selection becomes the new, permanent setting for the scanner.Command SyntaxMultiple modifiers and commands can be issued within one sequence.  If addi-tional modifiers are to be applied to the same command, just add the modifiers to that command.  For example, to add 2 modifiers to the Image Snap com-mand, such as setting the Imaging Style to 1P and the Wait for Trigger to 1T, you would enter IMGSNP1P1T.  Note: After processing an image capture command (IMGSNP or IMGBOX), you must follow it with an IMGSHP command if you want to see it on your terminal.To add a command to a sequence, each new command is separated with a semicolon.  For example, to add the Image Ship command to the above sequence, you would enter IMGSNP1P1T;IMGSHP.  The imaging commands are:Image Snap - IMGSNP (page 8-2)Image Ship - IMGSHP (page 8-5)Intelligent Signature Capture - IMGBOX (page 8-14)The modifiers for each of these commands follow the command description.Note: The images included with each command description are examples only.  The results you achieve may be different from those included in this manual.  The quality of the output you receive will vary depending on lighting, quality of the initial image/object being captured, and distance of the scanner from the image/object.  To achieve a high quality image, it is recommended that you position your scanner 4-6" (10.2-15.2 cm) away from the image/object you are capturing.
8 - 2Step 1 - Take a Picture Using IMGSNPImage Snap - IMGSNPAn image is taken whenever the hardware button is pressed, or when the Image Snap (IMGSNP) command is processed.    The image snap command has many different modifiers that can be used to change the look of the image in memory.  Any number of modifiers may be appended to the IMGSNP command.  For example, you can use the following command to snap an image, increase the gain, and have the beeper sound once the snap is complete:  IMGSNP2G1BIMGSNP ModifiersP - Imaging Style  This sets the Image Snap style.  0P Decoding Style.  This processing allows a few frames to be taken until the exposure parameters are met.  The last frame is then available for further use.1P Photo Style  (default).  This mimics a simple digital camera, and results in a visually optimized image.2P Manual Style.  This is an advanced style that should only be used by an experienced user.  It allows you the most freedom to set up the scanner, and has no auto-exposure.B - BeeperCauses a beep to sound after an image is snapped.0B No beep (default)1B Sounds a beep when the image is captured. T - Wait for TriggerWaits for a hardware button push before taking the image.  This is only available when using Photo Style (1P).0T Takes image immediately (default)1T Waits for a button push, then takes the imageL - LED StateDetermines if the LEDs should be on or off, and when.  Ambient illumina-tion (0L) is preferred for taking pictures of color documents, such as ID cards, especially when the scanner is in a stand.  LED illumination (1L) is preferred when the scanner is handheld.  LED State is not available when using Decoding Style  (0P).  0L LEDs off (default)1L LEDs on
8 - 3E - ExposureExposure is used in Manual Style only (2P), and allows you to set the expo-sure time.  This is similar to setting a shutter speed on a camera.  The exposure time determines how long the scanner takes to record an image.  On a bright day, exposure times can be very short because plenty of light is available to help record an image. At nighttime, exposure time can increase dramatically due to the near absence of light.  Units are 127 microseconds.  (Default = 7874)   nE Range: 1 - 7874G - GainGain is used in Manual Style only (2P).  Like a volume control, the gain modifier boosts the signal and multiplies the pixel value. As you increase the gain, the noise in an image is also amplified.1G No gain (default)2G Medium gain4G Heavy gain8G Maximum gainExample of Exposure at 7874E with fluorescent lighting: Example of Exposure at 100E with fluorescent lighting:Example of Gain at 1G: Example of Gain at 4G: Example of Gain at 8G:
8 - 4W - Target White ValueSets the target for the median grayscale value in the captured image.  For capturing close-up images of high contrast documents, a lower setting, such as 75, is recommended.  Higher settings result in longer exposure times and brighter images, but if the setting is too high, the image may be overexposed.  Target White Value is only available when using Photo Style (1P).  (Default = 125)nW Range: 0 - 255D - Delta for AcceptanceThis sets the allowable range for the white value setting (see W - Target White Value).  Delta is only available when using Photo Style (1P).  (Default = 25)nD Range:  0 - 255U - Update TriesThis sets the maximum number of frames the scanner should take to reach the D - Delta for Acceptance.  Update Tries is only available when using Photo Style (1P).  (Default = 6)nU Range:  0 - 10% - Target Set Point PercentageSets the target point for the light and dark values in the captured image.  A setting of 75% means 75% of the pixels are at or below the target white value, and 25% of the pixels are above the target white value.  Altering this setting from the default is not recommended under normal circumstances.  To alter grayscale values, W - Target White Value should be used. (Default = 50)n% Range: 1 - 99Example of White Value at 75W: Example of White Value at 125W: Example of White Value at 200W:Example of Target Set Point Percentage at 97%:Example of Target Set Point Percentage at 40%:Example of Target Set Point Percentage at 50%:
8 - 5Step 2 - Ship a Picture Using IMGSHPImage Ship - IMGSHPAn image is taken whenever the button is pressed, or when the Image Snap (IMGSNP) command is processed.  The last image is always stored in memory.  You can “ship” the image by using the IMGSHP command. The image ship commands have many different modifiers that can be used to change the look of the image output.  Modifiers affect the image that is transmit-ted, but do not affect the image in memory.  Any number of modifiers may be appended to the IMGSHP command.  For example, you can use the following command to snap and ship a bitmap image with gamma correction and docu-ment image filtering:  IMGSNP;IMGSHP8F75K26U IMGSHP ModifiersA - Infinity FilterEnhances pictures taken from very long distances (greater than 10 feet or 3m).  The Infinity Filter should not be used with IMGSHP Modifiers (page 8-5).0A Infinity filter off (default)1A Infinity filter onExample of Infinity Filter off (0A) from approximately 12 feet (3.66m) away:Example of Infinity Filter on (1A)from approximately 12 feet (3.66m) away:
8 - 6C - CompensationFlattens the image to account for variations in illumination across the image.0C Compensation disabled (default)1C Compensation enabledD - Pixel DepthIndicates the number of bits per pixel in the transmitted image (KIM or BMP format only).8D 8 bits per pixel, grayscale image (default)1D 1 bit per pixel, black and white imageExample of Compensation at 0C: Example of Compensation at 1C:
8 - 7E - Edge SharpenAn edge sharpen filter cleans up the edges of an image, making it look cleaner and sharper.  While edge sharpening does make the image look cleaner, it also removes some fine detail from the original image.  The strength of the edge sharpen filter can be entered from 1 to 24.  Entering a 23E gives the sharpest edges, but also increases noise in the image.0E Don’t sharpen image (default)14E Apply edge sharpen for typical imagene Apply edge sharpen using strength n (n = 1-24) F - File FormatIndicates the desired format for the image.  0F KIM format 1F TIFF binary2F TIFF binary group 4, compressed3F TIFF grayscale4F Uncompressed binary (upper left to lower right, 1 pixel/bit, 0 padded end of line)5F Uncompressed grayscale (upper left to lower right, bitmap format)6F JPEG image (default)8F BMP format (lower right to upper left, uncompressed)10F TIFF color compressed image11F TIFF color uncompressed image12F JPEG color image14F BMP color format15F BMP Uncompressed raw imageExample of Edge Sharpen at 0E: Example of Edge Sharpen at 24E:
8 - 8H - Histogram StretchIncreases the contrast of the transmitted image.  Not available with some image formats.  0H No stretch  (default)1H Histogram stretchI - Invert ImageInvert image is used to rotate the image around the X or Y axis.  1ix Invert around the X axis (flips picture upside down)1iy Invert around the Y axis (flips picture left to right)Example of Histogram Stretch at 0H: Example of Histogram Stretch at 1H:Example of image with Invert Image set to 1ix:Example of image not inverted: Example of image with Invert Image set to 1iy:
8 - 9IF- Noise ReductionUsed to reduce the salt and pepper noise in an image.0if No salt and pepper noise reduction (default)1if Salt and pepper noise reductionIR - Image Rotate  0ir Image as snapped (rightside up) (default)1ir Rotate image 90 degrees to the right2ir Rotate image 180 degrees (upside down)3ir Rotate image 90 degrees to the leftExample of Noise Reduction On (1if):Example of Noise Reduction Off (0if):Example of Image Rotate set to  0ir: Example of Image Rotate set to  2ir:Example of Image Rotate set to  1ir: Example of Image Rotate set to  3ir:
8 - 10J - JPEG Image QualitySets the desired quality when the JPEG image format is selected.  Higher numbers result in higher quality, but larger files.  Smaller numbers result in greater amounts of lossy compression, faster transmission times, lower quality, but smaller files.  (Default =  50)nJ  Image is compressed as much as possible while preserving quality factor of n (n = 0 - 100)0J worst quality (smallest file)100Jbest quality (largest file)K - Gamma CorrectionGamma measures the brightness of midtone values produced by the image.  You can brighten or darken an image using gamma correction.  A higher gamma correction yields an overall brighter image.  The lower the setting, the darker the image.  The optimal setting for text images is 50K. 0K Gamma correction off (default)50K Apply gamma correction for brightening typical document imagenK Apply gamma correction factor n (n = 0-1,000)L, R, T, B, M - Image CroppingShips a window of the image by specifying the left, right, top, and bottom pixel coordinates.  Device columns are numbered 0 through 1279, and device rows are numbered 0 through 959.nL The left edge of the shipped image corresponds to column n of the image in memory.  Range: 000 - 843.  (Default =  0)nR The right edge of the shipped image corresponds to column n - 1 of the image in memory.  Range: 000 - 843.  (Default =  all columns)nT The top edge of the shipped image corresponds to row n of the image in memory.  Range: 000 - 639.  (Default =  0)Example of Gamma Correction set to 50K:Example of Gamma Correction set to 0K: Example of Gamma Correction set to 255K:
8 - 11nB The bottom edge of the shipped image corresponds to row n - 1 of the image in memory.  Range: 000 - 639.  (Default =  all rows)Alternately, specify the number of pixels to cut from the outside margin of the image; thus only the center pixels are transmitted.nM Margin:  cut n columns from the left, n + 1 columns from the right, n rows from the top, and n + 1 rows from the bottom of the image.  Ship the remaining center pixels.  Range:  0 - 238.  (Default =  0, or full image)P - ProtocolUsed for shipping an image.  Protocol covers two features of the image data being sent to the host.  It addresses the protocol used to send the data (Hmodem, which is an Xmodem 1K variant that has additional header infor-mation), and the format of the image data that is sent.0P None (raw data) 2P None (default for USB)3P Hmodem compressed (default for RS232)4P HmodemS - Pixel ShipPixel Ship sizes an image in proportion to its original size.  It decimates the image by shipping only certain, regularly spaced pixels.  For example, 4S would transmit every fourth pixel from every fourth line.  The smaller num-ber of pixels shipped, the smaller the image, however, after a certain point the image becomes unusable. Example of Image Crop set to 300L:Example of Image Crop set to 300R:Uncropped Image:Example of Image Crop set to 200T:Example of Image Crop set to 200B:Example of Image Crop set to 238M:
8 - 121S ship every pixel  (default)2S ship every 2nd pixel, both horizontally and vertically3S ship every 3rd pixel, both horizontally and verticallyU - Document Image FilterAllows you to input parameters to sharpen the edges and smooth the area between the edges of text in an image.  This filter should be used with gamma correction (see page 8-10), with the scanner in a stand, and the image captured using the command:IMGSNP1P0L168W90%32DThis filter typically provides better JPEG compression than the standard E - Edge Sharpen command (see page 8-13).  This filter also works well when shipping pure black and white images (1 bit per pixel).  The optimal setting is 26U.0U Document image filter off (default)26U Apply document image filter for typical document imagenU Apply document image filter using grayscale threshold n.  Use lower numbers when the image contrast is lower.  1U will have a similar effect to setting E - Edge Sharpen (page 8-7) to 22e.  Range:  0-255.Example of Pixel Ship set to 1S: Example of Pixel Ship set to 2S: Example of Pixel Ship set to 3S:Example of Document Image Filter set to 0U: Example of Document Image Filter set to 26U:
8 - 13V - Blur ImageSmooths transitions by averaging the pixels next to the hard edges of defined lines and shaded areas in an image.    0V Don’t blur (default)1V BlurW - Histogram ShipA histogram gives a quick picture of the tonal range of an image, or key type.  A low-key image has detail concentrated in the shadows; a high-key image has detail concentrated in the highlights; and an average-key image has detail concentrated in the midtones.  This modifier ships the histogram for an image.0W Don’t ship histogram (default)1W Ship histogramExample of Blur Image Off (0V): Example of Blur Image On (1V):Image used for histogram: Histogram of image at left:
8 - 14Image Size CompatibilityIf you have applications that expect an image ship to return exactly 640x480 pixels, scan the Force VGA Resolution bar code.  Default = Native ResolutionIntelligent Signature Capture - IMGBOXIMGBOX allows you to configure the size and location of a signature capture area relative to its proximity to a bar code.  This allows you to tailor a signature capture area to a specific form.  In order to use IMGBOX, you need a set form where the signature box location is in a known location relative to a bar code.  You can input the overall size of the signature area, as well as specify how far the signature area is from the bar code, vertically and horizontally.  You can also set the resolution and file format for the final output of the signature capture image.Note: IMGBOX commands can only be triggered by one of the following types of bar codes: PDF417, Code 39, Code 128, Aztec, Codabar, and Interleaved 2 of 5.  Once one of these symbologies has been read, the image is retained for a possible IMGBOX command.Signature Capture OptimizeIf you will be using your scanner to capture signatures frequently, you should optimize it for this purpose.  However, the speed of scanning bar codes may be slowed when this mode is enabled.  Default = Off.Force VGA Resolution*  Native ResolutionOptimize On* Optimize  Off
8 - 15The following IMGBOX example was executed and viewed using QuickView software.  This software is available at www.honeywellaidc.com.  Click on Soft-ware Downloads.  Select 4600r from the Products list, then select QuickView Software Utility.  Below is an example of a signature capture application.  In this example, the aimer is centered over the signature capture area and the trigger is pressed.  A single beep is emitted, indicating that the scanner has read a Code 128 bar code and the data has been transferred to the host.  If using a Granit scanner, the scanner also vibrates.   An IMGBOX command may now be sent from the host to specify the coordinates of the signature capture area below that code, and indicating that only that area containing the signature should be transferred as an image to the host.To see this example, align the aimer with the signature area (not with the bar code), then press the trigger.  Send the following IMGBOX command string after the button push:Example: IMGBOX245w37h55y.Note: Case is not important in the command string.  It is used here only for clarity.The following image is captured:The IMGBOX commands have many different modifiers that can be used to change the size and appearance of the signature image output by the scanner.  Modifiers affect the image that is transmitted, but do not affect the image in memory.  Any number of modifiers may be appended to the IMGBOX command.Note: The IMGBOX command will return a NAK unless a window size (width and height) are specified.  See H - Height of Signature Capture Area (page 8-17) and W - Width of Signature Capture Area (page 8-18).IMGBOX ModifiersA - Output Image Width
8 - 16This option is used to size the image horizontally.  If using this option, set the resolution (R) to zero.B - Output Image Height   This option is used to size the image vertically.  If using this option, set the resolution (R) to zero.D - Pixel DepthThis indicates the number of bits per pixel in the transmitted image, which defines whether it will be grayscale or black and white. 8D 8 bits per pixel, grayscale image  (default)1D 1 bit per pixel, black and white imageF - File FormatThis option indicates the type of file format in which to save the image.  0F KIM format1F TIFF binary2F TIFF binary group 4, compressed3F TIFF grayscale4F Uncompressed Binary5F Uncompressed grayscale6F JPEG image (default)7F Outlined imageExample of Image Width set to 200A:Example of Image Width set to 600A:Example of Image Height set to 50B:Example of Image Height set to 100B:
8 - 178F BMP formatH - Height of Signature Capture AreaThe height of the signature capture area must be measured in inches divided by .01.  In the example, the height of the area to be captured is 3/8 inch, resulting in a value of H = .375/0.01 = 37.5.  K - Gamma CorrectionGamma measures the brightness of midtone values produced by the image.  You can brighten or darken an image using gamma correction.  A higher gamma correction yields an overall brighter image.  The lower the setting, the darker the image.  The optimal setting for text images is 50K. 0K Gamma correction off (default) 50K Apply gamma correction for brightening typical document imagenK Apply gamma correction factor n (n = 1-255)R - Resolution of Signature Capture AreaThe resolution is the number of pixels that the scanner outputs per each minimum bar width.  The higher the value for R, the higher the quality of the image, but also the larger the file size.  Values begin at 1000.  The scanner automatically inserts a decimal point between the first and second digit.  Example:   IMGBOX245w37h55y.Example of Gamma Correction set to 50K:Example of Gamma Correction set to 0K:Example of Gamma Correction set to 255K:
8 - 18For example, use 2500 to specify a resolution of 2.5.  Set to zero when using the A and B modifiers (see A - Output Image Width and B - Output Image Height on page 8-16).S - Bar Code Aspect RatioAll dimensions used in IMGBOX are measured as multiples of the minimum element size of the bar code.  The bar code aspect ratio allows you to set the ratio of the bar code height to the narrow element width.  In the exam-ple, the narrow element width is .010 inches and the bar code height is 0.400 inches, resulting in a value of S = 0.4/0.01 = 40.W - Width of Signature Capture AreaThe width of the signature capture area must be measured in inches divided by .01.  In the example, the width of the area to be captured is 2.4 inches, resulting in a value of W = 2.4/0.01 = 240.  (A value of 245 was used in the example to accommodate a slightly wider image area.)X - Horizontal Bar Code OffsetThe horizontal bar code offset allows you to offset the horizontal center of the signature capture area.  Positive values move the horizontal center to the right and negative values to the left.  Measurements are in multiples of the minimum bar width.  Example of Resolution set to 1000R:Example of Resolution set to 0R:Example of Resolution set to 2000R:Example:   IMGBOX245w37h55y.Example of Horizontal Offset set to -75X:Example of Horizontal Offset set to 75X:
8 - 19Y - Vertical Bar Code OffsetThe vertical bar code offset allows you to offset the vertical center of the signature capture area.  Negative numbers indicate that the signature cap-ture is above the bar code, and positive numbers indicate that the area is below the bar code.  Measurements are in multiples of the minimum bar width.   RF Default Imaging DeviceThe scanner supports imaging command processing (IMGSHP, IMGSNP, IMG-BOX) so that EZConfig-Scanning (see page 10-3) and other applications are able to perform imaging functions as if they were communicating directly with a scanner.  To accomplish this, the scanner uses a menu command called RF_DID (RF Default Imaging Device).  RF_DID is the name of the scanner (BT_NAM) that is to receive imaging commands.  The default for RF_DID is “*”indicating that imaging commands are to be sent to all associated scanners.  Change this setting to RF_DIDscanner_name to ensure that they are sent to a particular scanner.  Refer to "Paging" on page 3-10 to generate a report con-taining the port, work group, scanner name, and address for each scanner.  Refer to "Scanner Name" on page 3-26 set a unique name for each scanner.Example of Vertical Offset set to -7Y:Example of Vertical Offset set to 65Y:
8 - 20
9 - 19Interface KeysKeyboard Function RelationshipsThe following Keyboard Function Code, Hex/ASCII Value, and Full ASCII “CTRL”+  relationships apply to all terminals that can be used with the scanner.  Refer to page 2-22 enable Control + X (Control + ASCII) Mode.Function Code HEX/ASCII Value Full ASCII (CTRL + X Mode)NUL 00 @SOH 01 ASTX 02 BETX 03 CEOT 04 DENQ 05 EACK 06 FBEL 07 GBS 08 HHT 09 ILF 0A JVT 0B KFF 0C LCR 0D MSO 0E NSI 0F ODLE 10 PDC1 11 QDC2 12 RDC3 13 SDC4 14 TNAK 15 USYN 16 VETB 17 WCAN 18 XEM 19 YSUB 1A ZESC 1B [FS 1C \GS 1D ]RS 1E ^US 1F _
9 - 2The last five characters in the Full ASCII “CTRL”+ column  ( [ \ ] 6 - ), apply to US only.  The following chart indicates the equivalents of these five characters for different countries.Country CodesUnited States [\]6-Belgium [ < ] 6 -Scandinavia 8 < 9 6 -France ^8$6=Germany à + 6 -Italy \ + 6 -Switzerland <. . 6 -United Kingdom [ ¢ ] 6 -Denmark 8 \ 9 6 -Norway 8\ 96-Spain [\]6-
9 - 3Supported Interface KeysASCII HEXIBM PC/AT and  Compatibles, USB PC KeyboardApple Mac/iMac Supported KeysNUL 00 Reserved ReservedSOH 01 Enter (KP) Enter/Numpad EnterSTX 02 Cap Lock CAPSETX 03 ALT make ALT makeEOT 04 ALT break ALT breakENQ 05 CTRL make CNTRL makeACK 06 CTRL break CNTRL breakBEL 07 CR/Enter RETURNBS 08 Reserved APPLE makeHT 09 Tab TABLF 0A Reserved APPLE breakVT 0B Tab TABFF 0C Delete DelCR 0D CR/Enter RETURNSO 0E Insert Ins HelpSI 0F Escape ESCDLE 10 F11 F11DC1 11 Home HomeDC2 12 Print Prnt ScrnDC3 13 Back Space BACKSPACEDC4 14 Back Tab LSHIFT TABNAK 15 F12 F12SYN 16 F1 F1ETB 17 F2 F2CAN 18 F3 F3EM 19 F4 F4SUB 1A F5 F5ESC 1B F6 F6FS 1C F7 F7GS 1D F8 F8RS 1E F9 F9US 1F F10 F10DEL 7F BACKSPACE
9 - 4
10 - 110UtilitiesTo Add a Test Code I.D. Prefix to All SymbologiesThis selection allows you to turn on transmission of a Code I.D. before the decoded symbology.  (See the Symbology Charts, beginning on page A-1) for the single character code that identifies each symbology.)  This action first clears all current prefixes, then programs a Code I.D. prefix for all symbologies.  This is a temporary setting that will be removed when the unit is power cycled.Show Decoder RevisionScan the bar code below to output the decoder revision.Show Scan Driver RevisionScan the bar code below to output the scan driver revision.  The scan driver controls image capture.Show Software RevisionScan the bar code below to output the current software revision, unit serial num-ber, and other product information for both the scanner and base.Add Code I.D. Prefix toAll Symbologies (Temporary)Show Decoder RevisionShow Scan Driver RevisionShow Revision
10 - 2Show Data FormatScan the bar code below to show current data format settings.Test MenuWhen you scan the Test Menu On code, then scan a programming code in this manual, the scanner displays the content of a programming code.  The pro-gramming function will still occur, but in addition, the content of that program-ming code is output to the terminal.  Note: This feature should not be used during normal scanner operation.TotalFreedomTotalFreedom is an open system architecture that makes it possible for you cre-ate applications that reside on your scanner.  Decoding apps and Data Format-ting  apps can be created using TotalFreedom.  For further information about TotalFreedom, go to our website at www.honeywellaidc.com.Data Format SettingsDFMBK3?.On* Off
10 - 3Application Plug-Ins (Apps)Any apps that you are using can be turned off or on by scanning the following bar codes.  Apps are stored in groups: Decoding, and Formatting.  You can enable and disable these groups of apps by scanning that group’s On or Off bar code below.  You can also scan the List Apps bar code to output a list of all your apps. Note: You must reset your device in order for the apps setting to take effect.EZConfig-Scanning IntroductionEZConfig-Scanning provides a wide range of PC-based programming functions that can be performed on a scanner connected to your PC's COM port.  EZCon-fig-Scanning allows you to download upgrades to the scanner's firmware, change programmed parameters, and create and print programming bar codes.  Using EZConfig-Scanning, you can even save/open the programming parame-ters for a scanner.  This saved file can be e-mailed or, if required, you can create a single bar code that contains all the customized programming parameters and mail or fax that bar code to any location.  Users in other locations can scan the bar code to load in the customized programming. To communicate with a scanner, EZConfig-Scanning requires that the PC have at least one available serial communication port, or a serial port emulation using a physical USB port.  If you are using the serial port and RS232 cable, an exter-nal power supply is required.  When using a USB serial port emulation, only a USB cable is required.EZConfig-Scanning OperationsThe EZConfig-Scanning software performs the following operations:* Decoding Apps OnDecoding Apps Off* Formatting Apps OnFormatting Apps OffList Apps
10 - 4Scan DataScan Data allows you to scan bar codes and display the bar code data in a window.  Scan Data lets you send serial commands to the scanner and receive scanner response that can be seen in the Scan Data win-dow.  The data displayed in the Scan Data window can either be saved in a file or printed. ConfigureConfigure displays the programming and configuration data of the scanner.  The scanner's programming and configuration data is grouped into different categories.  Each category is displayed as a tree item under the "Configure" tree node in the application explorer.  When one of these tree nodes is clicked, the right-hand side is loaded with the parameters' form belonging to that particular category.  The "Con-figure" tree option has all the programming and configuration parame-ters specified for a scanner.  You can set or modify these parameters as required.  You can later write the modified settings to the scanner, or save them to a dcf file. ImagingImaging provides all the image-related functions that a 2D Scanner can perform. You can capture an image using the current settings, and the image will be displayed in an image window.  Images captured from the scanner can be saved to files in different image formats.  You can modify the image settings and save the image settings to an INI file, which can be loaded later to capture new images.  Imaging also lets you preview the images continuously captured by the scanner. Installing EZConfig-Scanning from the WebNote: EZConfig-Scanning requires .NET software.  If .NET is not installed on your PC, you will be prompted to install it during the EZConfig-Scanning installation.1. Access the Honeywell web site at www.honeywellaidc.com2. Click on the Resources tab.  Select Software.3. Click on the dropdown for Select Product Number.  Click on 1900.4. Click on the listing for EZConfig-Scanning.5. When prompted, select Save File, and save the files to the c:\windows\temp directory.  6. Once you have finished downloading the file, exit the web site.7. Using Explorer, go to the c:\windows\temp file.8. Double click on the Setup.exe file.  Follow the screen prompts to install the EZConfig-Scanning program.
10 - 59. If you’ve selected the defaults during installation, you can click on Start Menu-All Programs-Honeywell-EZConfig-Scanning.
10 - 6
11 - 111Serial Programming CommandsThe serial programming commands can be used in place of the programming bar codes.  Both the serial commands and the programming bar codes will pro-gram the scanner.  For complete descriptions and examples of each serial pro-gramming command, refer to the corresponding programming bar code in this manual.The device must be set to an RS232 interface (see page 2-2).  The following commands can be sent via a PC COM port using terminal emulation software.ConventionsThe following conventions are used for menu and query command descriptions:parameterA label representing the actual value you should send as part of a command.[option]An optional part of a command.{Data}Alternatives in a command.boldNames of menus, menu commands, buttons, dialog boxes, and windows that appear on the screen.Menu Command SyntaxMenu commands have the following syntax (spaces have been used for clarity only):Prefix [:Name:] Tag SubTag {Data} [, SubTag {Data}] [; Tag SubTag {Data}] […] StoragePrefixThree ASCII characters: SYN M CR  (ASCII 22,77,13).:Name:To send information to the scanner (with the base connected to host), use :Xenon:  The default factory setting for a Xenon scanner is Xenon scanner.  This setting is changed by using the BT_NAM command, which accepts alphanumeric values.  If the name is not known, a wildcard (*) can be used :*:.Note: Since the base stores all work group settings and transfers to them to scanner once they are linked, changes are typically done to the base and not to the scanner.Tag A 3 character case-insensitive field that identifies the desired menu command group.  For example, all RS232 configuration settings are identified with a Tag of 232.SubTagA 3 character case-insensitive field that identifies the desired menu command within the tag group.   For example, the SubTag for the RS232 baud rate is BAD.DataThe new value for a menu setting, identified by the Tag and SubTag.
11 - 2StorageA single character that specifies the storage table to which the command is applied.  An exclamation point (!) performs the command’s operation on the device’s volatile menu configuration table.  A period (.) performs the command’s operation on the device’s non-volatile menu configuration table.  Use the non-volatile table only for semi-permanent changes you want saved through a power cycle.Query CommandsSeveral special characters can be used to query the device about its settings.^What is the default value for the setting(s).?What is the device’s current value for the setting(s).*What is the range of possible values for the setting(s).  (The device’s response uses a dash (-) to indicate a continuous range of values.  A pipe (|) separates items in a list of non-continuous values.):Name: Field Usage (Optional)This command returns the query information from the scanner.Tag Field UsageWhen a query is used in place of a Tag field, the query applies to the entire set of commands available for the particular storage table indicated by the Storage field of the command.  In this case, the SubTag and Data fields should not be used because they are ignored by the device.  SubTag Field Usage When a query is used in place of a SubTag field, the query applies only to the subset of commands available that match the Tag field.  In this case, the Data field should not be used because it is ignored by the device.Data Field UsageWhen a query is used in place of the Data field, the query applies only to the specific command identified by the Tag and SubTag fields.Concatenation of Multiple CommandsMultiple commands can be issued within one Prefix/Storage sequence.   Only the Tag, SubTag, and Data fields must be repeated for each com-mand in the sequence.  If additional commands are to be applied to the same Tag, then the new command sequence is separated with a comma (,) and only the SubTag and Data fields of the additional command are issued.  If the additional command requires a different Tag field, the command is separated from previous commands by a semicolon (;).
11 - 3ResponsesThe device responds to serial commands with one of three responses:ACKIndicates a good command which has been processed.ENQIndicates an invalid Tag or SubTag command. NAKIndicates the command was good, but the Data field entry was out of the allowable range for this Tag and SubTag combination, e.g., an entry for a minimum message length of 100 when the field will only accept 2 characters.When responding, the device echoes back the command sequence with the status character inserted directly before each of the punctuation marks (the period, exclamation point, comma, or semicolon) in the command.Examples of Query CommandsIn the following examples, a bracketed notation [   ] depicts a non-displayable response.Example: What is the range of possible values for Codabar Coding Enable?Enter: cbrena*.Response: CBRENA0-1[ACK]This response indicates that Codabar Coding Enable (CBRENA) has a range of values from 0 to 1 (off and on).  Example: What is the default value for Codabar Coding Enable?Enter: cbrena^.Response: CBRENA1[ACK]This response indicates that the default setting for Codabar Coding Enable (CBRENA) is 1, or on.  Example: What is the device’s current setting for Codabar Coding Enable?Enter: cbrena?.Response: CBRENA1[ACK]This response indicates that the device’s Codabar Coding Enable (CBRENA) is set to 1, or on.  Example: What are the device’s settings for all Codabar selections?Enter: cbr?.Response: CBRENA1[ACK],SSX0[ACK],CK20[ACK],CCT1[ACK],MIN2[ACK],
11 - 4MAX60[ACK],DFT[ACK].This response indicates that the device’s Codabar Coding Enable (CBRENA) is set to 1, or on; the Start/Stop Character (SSX) is set to 0, or Don’t Transmit; the Check Character (CK2) is set to 0, or Not Required;concatenation (CCT) is set to 1, or Enabled; the Minimum Message Length (MIN) is set to 2 characters; the Maximum Message Length (MAX) is set to 60 characters; and the Default setting (DFT) has no value.  Trigger CommandsYou can activate and deactivate the scanner with serial trigger commands.  First, the scanner must be put in Manual Trigger Mode by scanning a Manual Trigger Mode bar code (page 4-7), or by sending a serial menu command for triggering (page 4-9).  Once the scanner is in serial trigger mode, the trigger is activated and deactivated by sending the following commands:Activate:  SYN T CRDeactivate: SYN U CRThe scanner scans until a bar code has been read, until the deactivate com-mand is sent, or until the serial time-out has been reached (see "Read Time-Out" on page 4-9 for a description, and the serial command on page 11-19).Resetting the Custom DefaultsIf you want the custom default settings restored to your scanner, scan the Acti-vate Custom Defaults bar code below.  This resets the scanner to the custom default settings.  If there are no custom defaults, it will reset the scanner to the factory default settings.  Any settings that have not been specified through the custom defaults will be defaulted to the factory default settings.Note: If using a cordless system, scanning this bar code also causes both the scanner and the base or Access Point to perform a reset and become unlinked.  The scanner must be placed in its base to re-establish the link.  If using an Access Point, the linking bar code must be scanned.  See Cordless System Operation beginning on page 3-1 for additional information.The charts on the following pages list the factory default settings for each of the commands (indicated by an asterisk (*) on the programming pages).Activate Custom Defaults
11 - 5Menu CommandsSelection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPageProduct Default SettingsSetting Custom DefaultsSet Custom Defaults MNUCDP 1-15Save Custom DefaultsMNUCDS 1-15Resetting the Custom DefaultsActivate Custom DefaultsDEFALT 1-16Resetting the Factory DefaultsRemove Custom DefaultsDEFOVR 1-16Activate Defaults  DEFALT 1-16Resetting the Factory Defaults - cordless scannersFactory Default Settings:All Application GroupsPAPDFT& 3-29Resetting the Custom Defaults - cordless scannersCustom Default Settings:All Application GroupsPAPDFT 3-30Programming the InterfacePlug and Play Codes Keyboard Wedge:IBM PC AT and Compatibles with CR suffixPAP_AT 2-1Laptop Direct Connect with CR suffixPAPLTD 2-1RS232 Serial Port PAP232 2-2
11 - 6Plug and Play Codes:RS485IBM Port 5B InterfacePAPP5B 2-2IBM Port 9B HHBCR-1 InterfacePAP9B1 2-2IBM Port 17 InterfacePAPP17 2-2IBM Port 9B HHBCR-2 InterfacePAP9B2 2-2RS485 Packet Mode OnRTLPDF1 2-3RS485 Packet Mode OffRTLPDF0 2-3RS485 Packet Length (20-256)RTLMPS 2-3Plug and Play Codes: IBM SurePosUSB IBM SurePos HandheldPAPSPH 2-4USB IBM SurePos TabletopPAPSPT 2-4Plug and Play Codes: USBUSB Keyboard (PC) PAP124 2-4USB Keyboard (Mac)PAP125 2-4USB Japanese Keyboard (PC)TRMUSB134 2-4USB HID PAP131 2-5USB Serial TRMUSB130 2-5CTS/RTS Emulation OnUSBCTS1 2-5CTS/RTS Emulation Off*USBCTS0 2-5ACK/NAK Mode On USBACK1 2-5ACK/NAK Mode Off* USBACK0 2-5Remote MasterMind for USBReM Off REMIFC0 2-6ReM On REMIFC1 2-6Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 7Plug and Play Codes Verifone Ruby Te r mi na lPAPRBY 2-6Gilbarco Terminal PAPGLB 2-7Honeywell Bioptic Aux PortPAPBIO 2-7Datalogic Magellan Aux PortPAPMAG 2-7NCR Bioptic Aux PortPAPNCR 2-8Wincor Nixdorf Te r mi na lPAPWNX 2-8Wincor Nixdorf BeetlePAPBTL 2-8Program Keyboard Country*U.S.A. KBDCTY0 2-9Albania KBDCTY35 2-9Azeri (Cyrillic) KBDCTY81 2-9Azeri (Latin) KBDCTY80 2-9Belarus KBDCTY82 2-9Belgium KBDCTY1 2-9Bosnia KBDCTY33 2-10Brazil KBDCTY16 2-10Brazil (MS) KBDCTY59 2-10Bulgaria (Cyrillic) KBDCTY52 2-10Bulgaria (Latin) KBDCTY53 2-10Canada (French legacy)KBDCTY54 2-10Canada (French) KBDCTY18 2-10Canada (Multilingual)KBDCTY55 2-10Croatia KBDCTY32 2-11Czech KBDCTY15 2-11Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 8Program Keyboard CountryCzech (Programmers)KBDCTY40 2-11Czech (QWERTY) KBDCTY39 2-11Czech (QWERTZ) KBDCTY38 2-11Denmark KBDCTY8 2-11Dutch (Netherlands) KBDCTY11 2-11Estonia KBDCTY41 2-11Faroese KBDCTY83 2-12Finland KBDCTY2 2-12France KBDCTY3 2-12Gaelic KBDCTY84 2-12Germany KBDCTY4 2-12Greek KBDCTY17 2-12Greek (220 Latin) KBDCTY64 2-12Greek (220) KBDCTY61 2-12Greek (319 Latin) KBDCTY65 2-13Greek (319) KBDCTY62 2-13Greek (Latin) KBDCTY63 2-13Greek (MS) KBDCTY66 2-13Greek (Polytonic) KBDCTY60 2-13Hebrew KBDCTY12 2-13Hungarian (101 key) KBDCTY50 2-13Hungary KBDCTY19 2-13Iceland KBDCTY75 2-13Irish KBDCTY73 2-14Italian (142) KBDCTY56 2-14Italy KBDCTY5 2-14Japan ASCII KBDCTY28 2-14Kazakh KBDCTY78 2-14Kyrgyz (Cyrillic) KBDCTY79 2-14Latin America KBDCTY14 2-14Latvia KBDCTY42 2-14Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 9Program Keyboard CountryLatvia (QWERTY) KBDCTY43 2-15Lithuania KBDCTY44 2-15Lithuania (IBM) KBDCTY45 2-15Macedonia KBDCTY34 2-15Malta KBDCTY74 2-15Mongolian (Cyrillic) KBDCTY86 2-15Norway KBDCTY9 2-15Poland KBDCTY20 2-15Polish (214) KBDCTY57 2-16Polish (Programmers)KBDCTY58 2-16Portugal KBDCTY13 2-16Romania KBDCTY25 2-16Russia KBDCTY26 2-16Russian (MS) KBDCTY67 2-16Russian (Typewriter) KBDCTY68 2-16SCS KBDCTY21 2-16Serbia (Cyrillic) KBDCTY37 2-17Serbia (Latin) KBDCTY36 2-17Slovakia KBDCTY22 2-17Slovakia (QWERTY) KBDCTY49 2-17Slovakia (QWERTZ) KBDCTY48 2-17Slovenia KBDCTY31 2-17Spain KBDCTY10 2-17Spanish variation KBDCTY51 2-17Sweden KBDCTY23 2-18Switzerland (French) KBDCTY29 2-18Switzerland (German)KBDCTY6 2-18Tatar KBDCTY85 2-18Turkey F KBDCTY27 2-18Turkey Q KBDCTY24 2-18Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 10Program Keyboard CountryUkrainian KBDCTY76 2-18United Kingdom KBDCTY7 2-18United Stated (Dvorak right)KBDCTY89 2-19United States (Dvorak left)KBDCTY88 2-19United States (Dvorak)KBDCTY87 2-19United States (International)KBDCTY30 2-19Uzbek (Cyrillic) KBDCTY77 2-19Keyboard Conversion *Keyboard Conversion OffKBDCNV0 2-21Convert all Characters to Upper CaseKBDCNV1 2-21Convert all Characters to Lower CaseKBDCNV2 2-21Keyboard Style *Regular KBDSTY0 2-19Caps Lock KBDSTY1 2-20Shift Lock KBDSTY2 2-20Automatic Caps LockKBDSTY6 2-20Emulate ExternalKeyboardKBDSTY5 2-20Control Character Output*Control Character Output OffKBDNPE0 2-21*Control Character Output OnKBDNPE1 2-21Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 11Keyboard Modifiers *Control + X Off KBDCAS0 2-22DOS Mode Control + XKBDCAS1 2-22Windows Mode Control + XKBDCAS2 2-22Windows Mode Prefix/Suffix OffKBDCAS3 2-22*Turbo Mode Off KBDTMD0 2-22Turbo Mode On KBDTMD1 2-22*Numeric Keypad OffKBDNPS0 2-23Numeric Keypad On KBDNPS1 2-23*Auto Direct Connect OffKBDADC0 2-23Auto Direct Connect OnKBDADC1 2-23Baud Rate 300 BPS 232BAD0 2-23600 BPS 232BAD1 2-231200 BPS 232BAD2 2-242400 BPS 232BAD3 2-244800 BPS 232BAD4 2-249600 BPS 232BAD5 2-2419200 BPS 232BAD6 2-2438400 BPS 232BAD7 2-2457600 BPS 232BAD8 2-24*115200 BPS 232BAD9 2-24Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 12Word Length:  Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity7 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even 232WRD3 2-257 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None232WRD0 2-257 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd232WRD6 2-257 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Even232WRD4 2-257 Data, 2 Stop, Parity None232WRD1 2-257 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Odd232WRD7 2-258 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Even232WRD5 2-25*8 Data, 1 Stop, Parity None232WRD2 2-268 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Odd232WRD8 2-267 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Space232WRD9 2-267 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Space232WRD10 2-268 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Space232WRD11 2-267 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Mark232WRD12 2-267 Data, 2 Stop, Parity Mark232WRD13 2-268 Data, 1 Stop, Parity Mark232WRD14 2-26RS232 Receiver Time-outRange 0 -  300 seconds 232LPT### 2-27Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 13RS232 Handshaking *RTS/CTS Off 232CTS0 2-27Flow Control, No Timeout232CTS1 2-27Two-Direction Flow Control232CTS2 2-27 Flow Control with Timeout232CTS3 2-27RS232 Timeout 232DEL#### 2-28*XON/XOFF Off 232XON0 2-28XON/XOFF On 232XON1 2-28*ACK/NAK Off 232ACK0 2-29ACK/NAK On 232ACK1 2-29Scanner-Bioptic Packet Mode*Packet Mode Off 232PKT0 2-29Packet Mode On 232PKT2 2-3Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK Mode*Bioptic ACK/NAK Off232NAK0 2-30Bioptic ACK/NAK On232NAK1 2-30Scanner-Bioptic ACK/NAK TimeoutACK/NAK Timeout*5100232DLK##### 2-30Cordless System OperationNote: This section applies only to cordless systems.  It does not apply to corded scanners.Base Power Communication Indicator*On :*:BASRED1 3-9Off :*:BASRED0 3-9Reset Scanner Reset Scanner RESET_ 3-9Scanning While in Base CradleScanning in Cradle OffBT_SIC0 3-10*Scanning in Cradle On (CCB01-010BT default)BT_SIC1 3-10Shut Down Scanner in Cradle BT_SIC2 3-10Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 14Paging Mode *On BEPPGE1 3-10Off BEPPGE0 3-10Paging Pitch Range 400 - 9000 Hz (*1000)BEPPFQ#### 3-10Beeper Pitch - Base Error*Razz (250) (min 200Hz)BASFQ2250 3-11Medium (3250) BASFQ23250 3-11High (4200) (max 9000Hz)BASFQ24200 3-11Number of Beeps  - Base Error*1 BASERR3 3-12Range 1 - 9 BASERR# 3-12Scanner Report Scanner Report RPTSCN 3-12Scanner Address Scanner Address BT_LDA 3-12Base Address Base Address :*:BASLDA 3-12Scanner Modes Charge Only Mode :*:BASLNK0 3-13*Charge and Link Mode:*:BASLNK1 3-13Locked Link Mode BASCON0,DNG1 3-14*Open Link Mode BASCON1,DNG1 3-14Unlink Scanner BT_RMV 3-14Override Locked ScannerBT_RPL1 3-15Out-of-Range Alarm Base Alarm  Duration (Range 1 - 3000 sec (*0))BASORD 3-15Scanner Alarm Duration (Range 1 - 3000 sec (*0))BT_ORD 3-15Alarm Sound Type Base Alarm Type BASORW 3-16Scanner Alarm Type BT_ORW 3-16Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 15Scanner Power Time-Out Timer Timer (0-7200 seconds)BT_LPT0 3-17200 Seconds BT_LPT200 3-17400 Seconds BT_LPT400 3-17900 Seconds BT_LPT900 3-173600 Seconds BT_LPT3600 3-177200 Seconds BT_LPT7200 3-17Flexible Power Management*Full Power BT_TXP100 3-18Medium Power BT_TXP35 3-18Medium Low Power BT_TXP5 3-18Low Power BT_TXP1 3-18Reset Reset Base RESET_ 3-19Reset Scanner :*:RESET_ 3-19Batch Mode Automatic Batch ModeBATENA1 3-20*Batch Mode Off BATENA0 3-20Inventory Batch ModeBATENA2 3-20Persistent Batch ModeBATENA3 3-20Batch Mode Beep Off BATBEP0 3-20*On BATBEP1 3-20Batch Mode Storage *Flash Storage BATNVS1 3-21RAM Storage BATNVS0 3-21Batch Mode Quantity *Off BATQTY0 3-21On BATQTY1 3-21Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 16Quantity Codes 0 BATNUM0 3-22*1 BATNUM1 3-222 BATNUM2 3-223 BATNUM3 3-224 BATNUM4 3-225 BATNUM5 3-236 BATNUM6 3-237 BATNUM7 3-238 BATNUM8 3-239 BATNUM9 3-23Batch Mode Output Order*FIFO BATLIF0 3-23LIFO BATLIF1 3-23Total Records Total Records BATNRC 3-24Delete Last Code Delete Last Code BATUND 3-24Clear All Codes Clear All Codes BATCLR 3-24Transmit Records to HostTransmit Inventory RecordsBAT_TX 3-24Batch Mode Transmit Delay*Off BATDLY0 3-25Short (ms) BATDLY250 3-25Medium (ms) BATDLY500 3-25Long (ms) BATDLY1000 3-25Multiple ScannerOperationMultiple Scanner OperationBASCON2,DNG3 3-26Scanner Name Name 1-7 BT_NAM##### 3-26Reset RESET_ 3-27Scanner Name BT_NAM 3-27Application Work GroupSelections*Group 0 GRPSEL0 3-28Group 1-6 GRPSEL# 3-28Resetting the Factory Defaults: All Application Work GroupsFactory Default Settings:All Work GroupsPAPDFT& 3-29Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 17Resetting the Custom Defaults: All Application Work GroupsCustom Default Settings:All Work GroupsPAPDFT 3-30Bluetooth ConnectionBluetooth HID Keyboard ConnectPAPBTH 3-30Bluetooth HID Keyboard DisconnectPAPSPP 3-32Bluetooth Serial Port - PCs/LaptopsBT_TRM0;BT_DNG53-33BT Connection - PDA/Mobility Systems DeviceBT_TRM0;BT_DNG13-33Bluetooth PIN Code BT_PIN 3-33Bluetooth PIN Code Bluetooth PIN BT_PIN 3-33Auto Reconnect Mode*Auto Reconnect On BT_ACM1 3-34Auto Reconnect Off BT_ACM0 3-34Maximum Link AttemptsMaximum Link AttemptsBT_MLA 3-35Relink Time-Out Relink Time-Out BT_RLT 3-36Host Command AcknowledgmentHost ACK On HSTACK1 3-38*Host ACK Off HSTACK0 3-38Input/Output SelectionsPower Up Beeper Power Up Beeper Off - ScannerBEPPWR0 4-1*Power Up Beeper On - ScannerBEPPWR1 4-1Power Up Beeper Off - Cordless BaseBASPWR0 4-1Power Up Beeper On - Cordless BaseBASPWR1 4-1Beep on BEL CharacterBeep on BEL On BELBEP1 4-2*Beep on BEL Off BELBEP0 4-2Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 18Trigger Click On BEPTRG1 4-2*Off BEPTRG0 4-2Beeper - Good Read  Off BEPBEP0 4-2*On BEPBEP1 4-2Beeper Volume - Good ReadOff BEPLVL0 4-2Low BEPLVL1 4-3Medium BEPLVL2 4-3*High BEPLVL3 4-3Beeper Pitch - Good Read  (Frequency)Low (1600) (min 400Hz)BEPFQ11600 4-3*Medium - Xenon (2700 Hz)BEPFQ12700 4-3*Medium - Granit (3200 Hz)BEPFQ13200 4-3High (4200) (max 9000Hz)BEPFQ14200 4-3Vibrate - Good Read Vibrate - Good Read OffTFBGRD0 4-4*Vibrate - Good Read OnTFBGRD1 4-4Vibrate Duration Duration(100 - 2,000 ms) *300TFBDUR#### 4-4Beeper Pitch - Error (Frequency)*Razz (250) (min 200Hz)BEPFQ2800 4-5Medium (3250) BEPFQ23250 4-5High (4200) (max 9000Hz)BEPFQ24200 4-5Beeper Duration - Good Read*Normal Beep BEPBIP0 4-5Short Beep BEPBIP1 4-5LED - Good Read  Off BEPLED0 4-5*On BEPLED1 4-5Number of Beeps - Error *1 BEPERR3 4-6Range 1 - 9 BEPERR# 4-6Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 19Number of Beeps - Good Read *1 BEPRPT1 4-6Range 1 - 9 BEPRPT# 4-6Beeper Volume Max Beeper Volume Max PAPBLM 4-6Good Read Delay *No Delay DLYGRD0 4-7Short Delay (500 ms)DLYGRD500 4-7Medium Delay (1000 ms)DLYGRD1000 4-7Long Delay (1500 ms)DLYGRD1500 4-7User-Specified Good Read DelayRange 0 - 30,000 msDLYGRD##### 4-7Manual Trigger Modes*Manual Trigger - NormalPAPHHF 4-8Manual Trigger - EnhancedPAPHHS 4-8LED Illumination - Manual TriggerOff PWRNOL0 4-8Low PWRNOL100 4-8Medium (Xenon only)PWRNOL120 4-8*High PWRNOL150 4-8Serial Trigger Mode Read Time-Out(0 - 300,000 ms) *30,000TRGSTO#### 4-9Presentation Mode Presentation Mode - XenonTRGMOD3 4-9Presentation Mode - GranitPAPTPR 4-9LED Illumination - Presentation ModeOff PWRLDC0 4-10Low PWRLDC100 4-10*High PWRLDC150 4-10Presentation LED Behavior After Decode*LEDs On TRGPCK1 4-10LEDs Off TRGPCK0 4-10Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 20Presentation SensitivityRange 0-20 (*1) TRGPMS## 4-11Presentation Centering WindowPresentation Centering OnPDCWIN1 4-12*Presentation Centering OffPDCWIN0 4-13Left of Presentation Centering Window (*40%)PDCLFT### 4-13Right of Presentation Centering Window (*60%)PDCRGT### 4-13Top of Presentation Centering Window (*40%)PDCTOP### 4-13Bottom of Presentation Centering Window (*60%)PDCBOT### 4-13In-Stand Sensor ModeSensor On TRGSSW1 4-14Sensor Off TRGSSW0 4-14CodeGate *CodeGate Off Out-of-StandAOSCGD0. 4-14CodeGate On Out-of-StandAOSCGD1. 4-14Streaming PresentationStreaming Presentation Mode - NormalPAPSPN 4-15Streaming Presentation Mode - EnhancedPAPSPE 4-15Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 21Mobile Phone Read ModeHand Held Scanning - Mobile PhonePAPHHC 4-16Streaming Presentation - Mobile PhonePAPSPC 4-16Hands Free Time-OutRange 0 - 300,000 msTRGPTO###### 4-16Reread Delay Short (500 ms) DLYRRD500 4-17*Medium (750 ms) DLYRRD750 4-17Long (1000 ms) DLYRRD1000 4-17Extra Long (2000 ms)DLYRRD2000 4-16User-Specified  Range 0 - 30,000 msDLYRRD##### 4-17Illumination Lights *Lights On SCNLED1 4-18Lights Off SCNLED0 4-18Aimer Delay 200 milliseconds SCNDLY200 4-18400 milliseconds SCNDLY400 4-18*Off (no delay) SCNDLY0 4-18User-Specified Aimer DelayRange 0 - 4,000 ms SCNDLY#### 4-18Scanner Time-Out 0 - 999,999 ms SDRTIM#### 4-19Aimer Mode Off SCNAIM0 4-19*Interlaced SCNAIM2 4-19Centering Window Centering On DECWIN1 4-20*Centering Off DECWIN0 4-21Left of Centering Window (*40%)DECLFT### 4-21Right of Centering Window (*60%)DECRGT### 4-21Top of Centering Window (*40%)DECTOP### 4-21Bottom of Centering Window (*60%)DECBOT### 4-21Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 22Preferred Symbology On PRFENA1 4-22*Off PRFENA0 4-22High Priority SymbologyPRFCOD## 4-22Low Priority SymbologyPRFBLK## 4-22Preferred Symbology Timeout(*500) Range 100-3000PRFPTO#### 4-23Preferred Symbology DefaultPRFDFT 4-23Output Sequence EditorEnter Sequence SEQBLK 4-26Default Sequence SEQDFT 4-26Partial Sequence Transmit Partial SequenceSEQTTS1 4-26*Discard Partial SequenceSEQTTS0 4-26Require Output SequenceRequired SEQ_EN2 4-27On/Not Required SEQ_EN1 4-27*Off SEQ_EN0 4-27Multiple Symbols On SHOTGN1 4-27*Off SHOTGN0 4-27No Read On SHWNRD1 4-28*Off SHWNRD0 4-28Video Reverse Video Reverse Only VIDREV1 4-28Video Reverse and Standard Bar CodesVIDREV2 4-28*Video Reverse Off VIDREV0 4-28Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 23Working Orientation *Upright ROTATN0 4-29Vertical, Bottom to Top (Rotate CCW 90°)ROTATN1 4-29Upside Down ROTATN2 4-29Vertical, Top to Bottom (Rotate CW 90°)ROTATN3 4-29Prefix/Suffix SelectionsAdd CR Suffix to All Symbologies VSUFCR 5-3Prefix Add Prefix PREBK2## 5-3Clear One Prefix PRECL2 5-3Clear All Prefixes PRECA2 5-3Suffix Add Suffix SUFBK2## 5-3Clear One Suffix SUFCL2 5-3Clear All Suffixes SUFCA2 5-3Function Code Tra n s m i t*Enable RMVFNC0 5-4Disable RMVFNC1 5-4Intercharacter Delay Range 0 - 1000 (5ms increments)DLYCHR## 5-5User Specified Intercharacter DelayDelay Length0 - 1000 (5ms increments)DLYCRX## 5-5Character to Trigger DelayDLY_XX## 5-5Interfunction Delay Range 0 - 1000 (5ms increments)DLYFNC## 5-6Intermessage Delay Range 0 - 1000 (5ms increments)DLYMSG## 5-6Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 24Data Formatter SelectionsData Format Editor *Default Data Format (None)DFMDF3 6-1Enter Data Format DFMBK3## 6-2Clear One Data FormatDFMCL3 6-3Clear All Data FormatsDFMCA3 6-3Data Formatter Data Formatter Off DFM_EN0 6-16*Data Formatter On,Not Required, Keep Prefix/SuffixDFM_EN1 6-17Data Format Required,Keep Prefix/SuffixDFM_EN2 6-17Data Formatter On,Not Required, Drop Prefix/SuffixDFM_EN3 6-17Data Format Required,Drop Prefix/SuffixDFM_EN4 6-17Data Format Non-Match Error Tone*Data Format Non-Match Error Tone OnDFMDEC0 6-18Data Format Non-Match Error Tone OffDFMDEC1 6-18Primary/Alternate Data FormatsPrimary Data FormatALTFNM0 6-18Data Format 1 ALTFNM1 6-18Data Format 2 ALTFNM2 6-18Data Format 3 ALTFNM3 6-18Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 25Single Scan Data Format ChangeSingle Scan-Primary Data FormatVSAF_0 6-19Single Scan-Data Format 1VSAF_1 6-19Single Scan-Data Format 2VSAF_2 6-19Single Scan-Data Format 3VSAF_3 6-19SymbologiesAll Symbologies All Symbologies Off ALLENA0 7-2All Symbologies On ALLENA1 7-2Codabar Default All Codabar SettingsCBRDFT 7-3Off CBRENA0 7-3*On CBRENA1 7-3Codabar Start/Stop Char.*Don’t Transmit CBRSSX0 7-3Transmit CBRSSX1 7-3Codabar Check Char.*No Check Char. CBRCK20 7-4Validate, But Don’t Tra n s m i tCBRCK21 7-4Validate, and Tra n s m i tCBRCK22 7-4Codabar Concatenation*Off CBRCCT0 7-4On CBRCCT1 7-4Require CBRCCT2 7-4Codabar Message LengthMinimum (2 - 60)  *4 CBRMIN## 7-5Maximum (2 - 60)  *60CBRMAX## 7-5Code 39 Default All Code 39 SettingsC39DFT 7-6Off C39ENA0 7-6*On C39ENA1 7-6Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 26Code 39 Start/Stop Char.*Don’t Transmit C39SSX0 7-6Transmit C39SSX1 7-6Code 39 Check Char. *No Check Char. C39CK20 7-7Validate, But Don’t TransmitC39CK21 7-7Validate, and TransmitC39CK22 7-7Code 39 Message LengthMinimum (0 - 48)  *0 C39MIN## 7-7Maximum (0 - 48)  *48C39MAX## 7-7Code 39 Append *Off C39APP0 7-8On C39APP1 7-8Code 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)*Off C39B320 7-8On C39B321 7-8Code 39 Full ASCII *Off C39ASC0 7-9On C39ASC1 7-9Code 39 Code Page C39DCP 7-10Interleaved 2 of 5 Default All Interleaved2 of 5 SettingsI25DFT 7-10Off I25ENA0 7-10*On I25ENA1 7-10Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit*No Check Char. I25CK20 7-11Validate, But Don’t TransmitI25CK21 7-11Validate, and TransmitI25CK22 7-11Interleaved 2 of 5 Message LengthMinimum (2 - 80)  *4 I25MIN## 7-11Maximum (2 - 80)  *80I25MAX## 7-11Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 27NEC 2 of 5 Default All NEC2 of 5 SettingsN25DFT 7-12Off N25ENA0 7-12*On N25ENA1 7-12NEC 2 of 5 Check Digit*No Check Char. N25CK20 7-12Validate, But Don’t Tra n s m i tN25CK21 7-12Validate, and Tra n s m i tN25CK22 7-12NEC 2 of 5 Message LengthMinimum (2 - 80)  *4 N25MIN## 7-13Maximum (2 - 80)  *80N25MAX## 7-13Code 93 Default All Code 93 SettingsC93DFT 7-14Off C93ENA0 7-14*On C93ENA1 7-16Code 93 Message LengthMinimum (0 - 80)  *0 C93MIN## 7-14Maximum (0 - 80)  *80C93MAX## 7-14Code 93 Append On C93APP1 7-15*Off C93APP0 7-15Code 93 Code Page Code 93 Code Page C93DCP 7-15Straight 2 of 5 IndustrialDefault All Straight 2 of 5 Industrial SettingsR25DFT 7-16*Off R25ENA0 7-16On R25ENA1 7-16Straight 2 of 5 Industrial Message LengthMinimum (1 - 48)  *4 R25MIN## 7-16Maximum (1 - 48)  *48R25MAX## 7-16Straight  2 of 5 IATA Default All Straight 2 of 5 IATASettingsA25DFT 7-17Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 28Straight  2 of 5 IATA *Off A25ENA0 7-17On A25ENA1 7-17Straight  2 of 5 IATA Message LengthMinimum (1 - 48)  *4 A25MIN## 7-17Maximum (1 - 48)  *48A25MAX## 7-17Matrix 2 of 5 Default All Matrix 2 of 5SettingsX25DFT 7-18*Off X25ENA0 7-18On X25ENA1 7-18Matrix 2 of 5 Message LengthMinimum (1 - 80)  *4 X25MIN## 7-18Maximum (1 - 80)  *80X25MAX## 7-18Code 11 Default All Code 11 SettingsC11DFT 7-19*Off C11ENA0 7-19On C11ENA1 7-19Code 11 Check Digits Required1 Check Digit C11CK20 7-19*2 Check Digits C11CK21 7-19Code 11 Message LengthMinimum (1 - 80)  *4 C11MIN## 7-20Maximum (1 - 80)  *80C11MAX## 7-20Code 128 Default All Code 128Settings128DFT 7-20Off 128ENA0 7-20*On 128ENA1 7-20ISBT Concatenation *Off ISBENA0 7-21On ISBENA1 7-21Code 128 Message LengthMinimum (0 - 80)  *0 128MIN## 7-21Maximum (0 - 80)  *80128MAX## 7-21Code 128 Append *On 128APP1 7-21Off 128APP0 7-21Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 29Code 128 Code Page Code 128 Code Page (*2)128DCP## 7-22GS1-128 Default All GS1-128 SettingsGS1DFT 7-23*On GS1ENA1 7-23Off GS1ENA0 7-23GS1-128 Message LengthMinimum (1 - 80)  *1 GS1MIN## 7-23Maximum (0 - 80)  *80GS1MAX## 7-23Telepen Default All TelepenSettingsTELDFT 7-24*Off TELENA0 7-24On TELENA1 7-24Telepen Output *AIM Telepen Output TELOLD0 7-24Original Telepen OutputTELOLD1 7-24Telepen Message LengthMinimum (1 - 60)  *1 TELMIN## 7-25Maximum (1 - 60)  *60TELMAX## 7-25UPC-A Default All UPC-A SettingsUPADFT 7-25Off UPAENA0 7-26*On UPAENA1 7-26UPC-A Check Digit Off UPACKX0 7-25*On UPACKX1 7-26UPC-A Number SystemOff UPANSX0 7-26*On UPANSX1 7-26UPC-A 2 Digit Addenda*Off UPAAD20 7-26On UPAAD21 7-26UPC-A 5 Digit Addenda*Off UPAAD50 7-26On UPAAD51 7-26UPC-A Addenda Required*Not Required UPAARQ0 7-27Required UPAARQ1 7-27Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 30UPC-A Addenda SeparatorOff UPAADS0 7-27*On UPAADS1 7-27UPC-A/EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code*Off CPNENA0 7-28Allow Concatenation CPNENA1 7-28Require ConcatenationCPNENA2 7-28Coupon GS1 DataBar OutputGS1 Output Off CPNGS10 7-28GS1 Output On CPNGS11 7-28UPC-E0 Default All UPC-ESettingsUPEDFT 7-29Off UPEEN00 7-29*On UPEEN01 7-29UPC-E0 Expand *Off UPEEXP0 7-29On UPEEXP1 7-29UPC-E0 Addenda RequiredRequired UPEARQ1 7-30*Not Required UPEARQ0 7-30UPC-E0 Addenda Separator*On UPEADS1 7-30Off UPEADS0 7-30UPC-E0 Check Digit Off UPECKX0 7-30*On UPECKX1 7-30UPC-E0 Leading ZeroOff UPENSX0 7-31*On UPENSX1 7-31UPC-E0 Addenda 2 Digit Addenda On UPEAD21 7-31*2 Digit Addenda Off UPEAD20 7-315 Digit Addenda On UPEAD51 7-31*5 Digit Addenda Off UPEAD50 7-31UPC-E1 *Off UPEEN10 7-31On UPEEN11 7-31EAN/JAN-13 Default All EAN/JAN SettingsE13DFT 7-32Off E13ENA0 7-32*On E13ENA1 7-32Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 31Convert UPC-A to EAN-13UPC-A Converted to EAN-13UPAENA0 7-32Do not Convert UPC-AUPAENA1 7-32EAN/JAN-13 Check DigitOff E13CKX0 7-33*On E13CKX1 7-32EAN/JAN-13 2 Digit Addenda2 Digit Addenda On E13AD21 7-33*2 Digit Addenda Off E13AD20 7-335 Digit Addenda On E13AD51 7-33*5 Digit Addenda Off E13AD50 7-33EAN/JAN-13 Addenda Required*Not Required E13ARQ0 7-33Required E13ARQ1 7-33EAN/JAN-13 Addenda SeparatorOff E13ADS0 7-34*On E13ADS1 7-34ISBN Translate *Off E13ISB0 7-34On E13ISB1 7-34EAN/JAN-8 Default All EAN/JAN 8 SettingsEA8DFT 7-35Off EA8ENA0 7-35*On EA8ENA1 7-35EAN/JAN-8 Check DigitOff EA8CKX0 7-35*On EA8CKX1 7-35EAN/JAN-8 Addenda *2 Digit Addenda Off EA8AD20 7-362 Digit Addenda On EA8AD21 7-36*5 Digit Addenda Off EA8AD50 7-365 Digit Addenda On EA8AD51 7-36EAN/JAN-8 Addenda Required*Not Required EA8ARQ0 7-36Required EA8ARQ1 7-36EAN/JAN-8 Addenda SeparatorOff EA8ADS0 7-36*On EA8ADS1 7-36Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 32MSI Default All MSI SettingsMSIDFT 7-37*Off MSIENA0 7-37On MSIENA1 7-37MSI Check Character *Validate Type 10, but Don’t TransmitMSICHK0 7-38Validate Type 10 and TransmitMSICHK1 7-38Validate 2 Type 10 Chars, but Don’t TransmitMSICHK2 7-38Validate 2 Type 10 Chars and TransmitMSICHK3 7-38Validate Type 10 then Type 11 Char, but Don’t TransmitMSICHK4 7-38Validate Type 10 then Type 11 Char and TransmitMSICHK5 7-38Disable MSI Check CharactersMSICHK6 7-38MSI Message Length Minimum (4 - 48) *4 MSIMIN## 7-38Maximum (4 - 48) *48MSIMAX## 7-38GS1 DataBar OmnidirectionalDefault All GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional SettingsRSSDFT 7-39Off RSSENA0 7-39*On RSSENA1 7-39GS1 DataBar Limited Default All GS1 DataBar Limited SettingsRSLDFT 7-39Off RSLENA0 7-39*On RSLENA1 7-39Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 33GS1 DataBar ExpandedDefault All GS1 DataBar Expanded SettingsRSEDFT 7-40Off RSEENA0 7-40*On RSEENA1 7-40GS1 DataBar Expanded Msg. LengthMinimum (4 - 74) *4 RSEMIN## 7-40Maximum (4 - 74) *74RSEMAX## 7-40Trioptic Code *Off TRIENA0 7-41On TRIENA1 7-41Codablock A Default All Codablock A SettingsCBADFT 7-41*Off CBAENA0 7-41On CBAENA1 7-41Codablock A Msg. LengthMinimum (1 - 600) *1CBAMIN### 7-42Maximum (1 - 600) *600CBAMAX### 7-42Codablock F Default All Codablock F SettingsCBFDFT 7-41*Off CBFENA0 7-43On CBFENA1 7-43Codablock F Msg. LengthMinimum (1 - 2048) *1CBFMIN#### 7-43Maximum (1 - 2048) *2048CBFMAX#### 7-43PDF417 Default All PDF417 SettingsPDFDFT 7-44*On PDFENA1 7-44Off PDFENA0 7-44Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 34PDF417 Msg. Length Minimum (1-2750) *1PDFMIN#### 7-44Maximum (1-2750)  *2750PDFMAX#### 7-44MacroPDF417 *On PDFMAC1 7-45Off PDFMAC0 7-45MicroPDF417 Default All Micro PDF417 SettingsMPDDFT 7-45On MPDENA1 7-45*Off MPDENA0 7-45MicroPDF417 Msg. LengthMinimum (1-366) *1 MPDMIN### 7-46Maximum (1-366)  *366MPDMAX### 7-46GS1 Composite CodesOn COMENA1 7-46*Off COMENA0 7-46UPC/EAN Version On COMUPC1 7-46*Off COMUPC0 7-46GS1 Composite Codes Msg. LengthMinimum (1-2435)  *1COMMIN#### 7-47Maximum (1-2435) *2435COMMAX#### 7-47GS1 Emulation GS1-128 Emulation EANEMU1 7-48GS1 DataBar EmulationEANEMU2 7-48GS1 Code Expansion OffEANEMU3 7-48EAN8 to EAN13 ConversionEANEMU4 7-48*GS1 Emulation Off EANEMU0 7-48TCIF Linked Code 39 On T39ENA1 7-48*Off T39ENA0 7-48Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 35QR Code Default All QR Code SettingsQRCDFT 7-56*On QRCENA1 7-49Off QRCENA0 7-49QR Code Msg. LengthMinimum (1-7089) *1QRCMIN#### 7-49Maximum (1-7089) *7089QRCMAX#### 7-49QR Code Append *On QRCAPP1 7-50Off QRCAPP0 7-50QR Code Page QR Code Page (*3) QRCDCP## 7-50Data Matrix Default All Data Matrix SettingsIDMDFT 7-51*On IDMENA1 7-51Off IDMENA0 7-51Data Matrix Msg. LengthMinimum (1-3116) *1IDMMIN#### 7-51Maximum (1-3116) *3116IDMMAX#### 7-51Data Matrix Append *On IDMAPP1 7-52Off IDMAPP0 7-52Data Matrix Code PageData Matrix Code Page (*51)IDMDCP## 7-52MaxiCode Default All MaxiCode SettingsMAXDFT 7-53On MAXENA1 7-53*Off MAXENA0 7-53MaxiCode Msg. LengthMinimum (1-150) *1 MAXMIN### 7-53Maximum (1-150) *150MAXMAX### 7-53Aztec Code Default All Aztec Code SettingsAZTDFT 7-54*On AZTENA1 7-54Off AZTENA0 7-54Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 36Aztec Code Msg. LengthMinimum (1-3832) *1AZTMIN#### 7-54Maximum (1-3832) *3832AZTMAX#### 7-54Aztec Append *On AZTAPP1 7-55Off AZTAPP0 7-55Aztec Code Page Aztec Code Page (*51)AZTDCP## 7-55Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) CodeDefault All Han Xin Code SettingsHX_DFT 7-56On HX_ENA1 7-56*Off HX_ENA0 7-56Chinese Sensible (Han Xin) Code Msg. LengthMinimum (1-7833) *1HX_MIN#### 7-56Maximum (1-7833) *7833HX_MAX#### 7-56Postal Codes - 2D2D Postal Codes *Off POSTAL0 7-57Single 2D Postal CodesAustralian Post On POSTAL1 7-57British Post On POSTAL7 7-57Canadian Post On POSTAL30 7-57Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPOSTAL10 7-57Japanese Post On POSTAL3 7-57KIX Post On POSTAL4 7-57Planet Code On POSTAL5 7-57Postal-4i On POSTAL9 7-57Postnet On POSTAL6 7-58Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL11 7-58InfoMail On POSTAL2 7-58Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 37Combination 2D Postal CodesInfoMail and British Post  OnPOSTAL8 7-58Intelligent Mail Bar Code and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL20 7-58Postnet and Postal-4i OnPOSTAL14 7-58Postnet and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPOSTAL16 7-58Postal-4i and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPOSTAL17 7-58Postal-4i and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL19 7-58Planet and Postnet OnPOSTAL12 7-58Planet and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL18 7-58Planet and Postal-4i OnPOSTAL13 7-59Planet and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPOSTAL15 7-59Planet, Postnet, and Postal-4i OnPOSTAL21 7-59Planet, Postnet, and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPOSTAL22 7-59Planet, Postal-4i, and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPOSTAL23 7-59Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 38Combination 2D Postal Codes(continued)Postnet, Postal-4i, and Intelligent Mail Bar Code OnPOSTAL24 7-59Planet, Postal-4i, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL25 7-59Planet, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL26 7-59 Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL27 7-59Planet, Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet  OnPOSTAL28 7-59Planet, Postal-4i, Intelligent Mail Bar Code, and Postnet with B and B’ Fields OnPOSTAL29 7-59Planet Code Check DigitTransmit PLNCKX1 7-60*Don’t Transmit PLNCKX0 7-60Postnet Check Digit Transmit NETCKX1 7-60*Don’t Transmit NETCKX0 7-60Australian Post InterpretationBar Output AUSINT0 7-61Numeric N Table AUSINT1 7-61Alphanumeric C TableAUSINT2 7-61Combination N and C TablesAUSINT3 7-61Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 39Postal Codes - LinearChina Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) Default All China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) SettingsCPCDFT 7-61*Off CPCENA0 7-62On CPCENA1 7-62China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5) Msg. LengthMinimum (2 - 80) *4 CPCMIN## 7-62Maximum (2 - 80) *80CPCMAX## 7-62Korea Post Default All Korea Post SettingsKPCDFT 7-63*Off KPCENA0 7-63On KPCENA1 7-63Korea Post Msg. LengthMinimum (2 - 80) *4 KPCMIN## 7-63Maximum (2 - 80) *48KPCMAX## 7-63Korea Post Check DigitTransmit Check Digit KPCCHK1 7-63*Don’t Transmit Check DigitKPCCHK0 7-63Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 40Imaging Default CommandsImage Snap Default all Imaging CommandsIMGDFT 8-1Imaging Style - DecodingSNPSTY0 8-2*Imaging Style - PhotoSNPSTY1 8-2Imaging Style - ManualSNPSTY2 8-2Beeper On SNPBEP1 8-2*Beeper Off SNPBEP0 8-2*Wait for Trigger Off SNPTRG0 8-2Wait for Trigger On SNPTRG1 8-2*LED State - Off SNPLED0 8-2LED State - On SNPLED1 8-2Exposure (1-7874 microseconds)SNPEXP 8-3*Gain - None SNPGAN1 8-3Gain - Medium SNPGAN2 8-3Gain - Heavy SNPGAN4 8-3Gain - Maximum SNPGAN8 8-3Target White Value (0-255) *125SNPWHT### 8-4Delta for Acceptance (0-255) *25SNPDEL### 8-4Update Tries (0-10) *6SNPTRY## 8-4Target Set Point Percentage (1-99) *50SNPPCT## 8-4Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 41Image Ship *Infinity Filter - Off IMGINF0 8-5Infinity Filter - On IMGINF1 8-5*Compensation Off IMGCOR0 8-6Compensation On IMGCOR1 8-6*Pixel Depth - 8 bits/pixel (grayscale)IMGBPP8 8-6Pixel Depth - 1 bit/pixel (B&W)IMGBPP1 8-6*Don’t Sharpen EdgesIMGEDG0 8-7Sharpen Edges (0-23)IMGEDG## 8-7*File Format - JPEG IMGFMT6 8-7File Format - KIM IMGFMT0 8-7File Format - TIFF binaryIMGFMT1 8-7File Format - TIFF binary group 4, compressedIMGFMT2 8-7File Format - TIFF grayscaleIMGFMT3 8-7File Format - Uncompressed binaryIMGFMT4 8-7File Format - Uncompressed grayscaleIMGFMT5 8-7File Format - BMP IMGFMT8 8-7*Histogram Stretch OffIMGHIS0 8-8Histogram Stretch OnIMGHIS1 8-8*Noise Reduction OffIMGFSP0 8-9Noise Reduction On IMGFSP1 8-9Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 42Image Ship (continued)Invert Image around X axisIMGNVX1 8-8Invert Image around Y axisIMGNVY1 8-8Rotate Image none IMGROT0 8-9Rotate Image 90° rightIMGROT1 8-9Rotate Image 180° rightIMGROT2 8-9Rotate Image 90° leftIMGROT3 8-9JPEG Image Quality (0-100) *50IMGJQF### 8-10*Gamma Correction OffIMGGAM0 8-10Gamma Correction On (0-1000)IMGGAM### 8-10Image Crop - Left (0-843) *0IMGWNL### 8-10Image Crop - Right (0-843) *843IMGWNR### 8-10Image Crop - Top (0-639) *0IMGWNT### 8-10Image Crop - Bottom (0-639) *639IMGWNB### 8-11Image Crop - Margin (1-238) *0IMGMAR### 8-11Protocol - None (raw)IMGXFR0 8-11Protocol - None (default USB)IMGXFR2 8-11Protocol - Hmodem CompressedIMGXFR3 8-11Protocol - Hmodem IMGXFR4 8-11Ship Every Pixel IMGSUB1 8-12Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 43Image Ship (continued)Ship Every 2nd Pixel IMGSUB2 8-12Ship Every 3rd Pixel IMGSUB3 8-12*Document Image Filter OffIMGUSH0 8-12Document Image Filter On (0-255)IMGUSH### 8-12*Don’t Ship HistogramIMGHST0 8-13Ship Histogram IMGHST1 8-13Image Size CompatibilityForce VGA ResolutionIMGVGA1 8-14*Native Resolution IMGVGA0 8-14Intelligent Signature CaptureOptimize On DECBND1 8-14*Optimize Off DECBND0 8-14Selection Setting* Indicates defaultSerial Command# Indicates a numeric entryPage
11 - 44
12 - 112Product SpecificationsXenon 1900/1910 Corded Scanner Product SpecificationsParameter SpecificationDimensions (Typical):Height 6.3 inches (16cm)Length 4.1 inches (10.41cm)Width 2.8 inches (7.11cm)Weight 5.2 ounces (147.42g)Illumination LED:Peak Wavelength 624nm + 18nm (red LED)IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”442nm, 552nm (white LED)  IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”Aiming:Peak Wavelength Laser 650nm  IEC 60825-1: “Class 2”Peak Wavelength LED 624nm + 18nm  IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”Optical Power Laser <1mW Image Size 838 x 640 pixels Skew Angle +65°Pitch Angle +45°Motion Tolerance:   Streaming Presentation Trigger up to 240 inches per second for 13 mil UPCSymbol Contrast Grade 1.0 (20% or greater)Voltage Requirements 4 - 5.5 VDC at input connectorCurrent Draw @5VDCB&WColorScanning Standby470mA, 2.35W 90mA, .45W490mA, 2.45W 90mA, .45WPower Supply Noise Rejection Maximum 100mV peak to peak, 10 to 100 kHzTemperature Ranges:Operating +32°F to +122°F (0°C to 50°C)Storage -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to 70°C)
12 - 2Xenon 1902/1912 Cordless Scanner Product SpecificationsHumidity 0 to 95% non-condensingMechanical Drop Operational after 50 drops from 6 feet (1.83m) to concrete at 23°CVibration Withstands 5G peak from 22 to 300 HzESD Tolerance Up to 15kV direct airUp to 8 kV indirect coupling planeParameter SpecificationDimensions (Typical):Height 6.3 inches (160cm)Length 4.1 inches (10.41cm)Width 2.8 inches (7.11cm)Weight 7.5 ounces (212.62g)Illumination LED:Peak Wavelength 624nm + 18nm (red LED) IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”442nm, 552nm (white LED)  IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”Aiming:Peak Wavelength Laser 650nm  IEC 60825-1: “Class 2”Peak Wavelength LED 624nm + 18nm  IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”Optical Power Laser <1mWImage Size 838 x 640 pixels Skew Angle +65°Pitch Angle +45°Motion Tolerance:   Streaming Presentation Trigger up to 240 inches per second for 13 mil UPCSymbol Contrast Grade 1.0 (20% or greater)Battery:Lithium Ion 1800 mAHr minimum   Number of Scans Up to 50,000 per chargeParameter Specification
12 - 3*Storage outside of this temperature range could be detrimental to battery life.Granit 1910i Industrial Corded Scanner Product Specifications   Expected Hours of Operation 14   Expected Charge Time 4.5 hoursRadio:Frequency 2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping Bluetooth v.2.1Range 33 ft. (10 m) typicalData Rate Up to 1 MBpsTemperature Ranges:Operating 32° F to +122° F (0° C to 50° C)Storage* -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to 70°C)Humidity Up to 95% non-condensingMechanical Drop Operational after 50 drops from 6 feet (1.8 m) to concreteVibration Withstands 5G peak from 22 to 300 HzESD Sensitivity Up to 15kV direct airUp to 8 kV indirect coupling planeSealant Rating IP41Parameter SpecificationDimensions (Typical):Height 7.7 in. (19.45cm)Length 5.2 in. (13.31cm)Width 2.9 in. (7.5cm)Weight 10.6 oz. (300g)Illumination LED:Peak Wavelength 656nm (hyper red LED)IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”Aiming:Peak Wavelength Laser 650nmIEC 60825-1: “Class 2”Optical Power Laser <1mW Image Size 838 x 640 pixelsSkew Angle +65°Parameter Specification
12 - 4Granit 1911i Industrial Cordless Scanner Product SpecificationsPitch Angle +45°Motion Tolerance:   Streaming Presentation Trigger:   13 mil UPC240 inches per second at 6.5 in. (16.5cm)150 inches per second at 10 in. (25.4cm)Symbol Contrast Grade 1.0 (20% or greater)Voltage Requirements 4 - 5.5 VDC at input connectorCurrent Draw @5VDC Scanning Standby470mA, 2.35W 100mA, .5WPower Supply Noise Rejection Maximum 100mV peak to peak, 10 to 100 kHzTemperature Ranges:Operating -22°F to +122°F (-30°C to 50°C)Storage -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to 70°C)Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensingMechanical Drop Operational after 50 drops from 6.5 feet (1.98m) to concrete at 23°, -30°, and 50°CVibration Complies with MIL-STD-810G, Method 514.6, Annex CESD Tolerance Up to 20kV direct airUp to 8 kV indirect coupling planeSealant Rating IP65Parameter SpecificationDimensions (Typical):Height 7.7 in. (19.45cm)Length 5.2 in. (13.31cm)Width 2.9 in. (7.5cm)Weight 12.9 oz. (365g)Illumination LED:Peak Wavelength 656nm (hyper red LED)IEC 62471: “Exempt Risk Group”Aiming:Peak Wavelength Laser 650nmIEC 60825-1: “Class 2”Optical Power Laser <1mW Parameter Specification
12 - 5*Storage outside of this temperature range could be detrimental to battery life.Image Size 838 x 640 pixelsSkew Angle +65°Pitch Angle +45°Motion Tolerance:   Streaming Presentation Trigger:   13 mil UPC240 inches per second at 6.5 in. (16.5cm)150 inches per second at 10 in. (25.4cm)Symbol Contrast Grade 1.0 (20% or greater)Battery:Lithium Ion 1800 mAHr minimum   Number of Scans Up to 50,000 per charge   Expected Hours of Operation 14   Expected Charge Time 4.5 hoursRadio:Frequency 2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping Bluetooth v.2.1Range 330 ft. (100m) typicalData Rate Up to 1 MBpsTemperature Ranges:Operating while not charging -4°F to + 122°F (-20°C to 50°C)Operating while charging 41°F to + 104°F (5°C to 40°C)Storage* -40°F to +158°F (-40°C to 70°C)Humidity Up to 95% non-condensingMechanical Drop Operational after 50 drops from 6.5 feet (1.98m) to concrete at 23°, -30°, and 50°CVibration Complies with MIL-STD-810G, Method 514.6, Annex CESD Sensitivity Up to 20kV direct airUp to 8 kV indirect coupling planeSealant Rating IP65Parameter Specification
12 - 6CCB01-010BT Charge Base Product SpecificationsParameter SpecificationDimensions (Typical):Height 3.2 inches (8.13cm)Length 5.19 inches (13.18cm)Width 3.98 inches (10.11cm)Weight 6.3 oz (179g)Voltage: 4.5 to 5.5 voltsCurrent Draw:Host Terminal Port 500mAAux Power Port 1ACharge Time 5 hoursRadio:Frequency 2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping Bluetooth v.2.1Range 33 ft. (10 m) typicalData Rate Up to 1 MBpsTemperature Ranges:Operating 32° F to +122° F (0° C to +50° C)Battery Charge 41° F to +104° F (5° C to +40° C)Storage -40° F to +158° F (-40° C to +70° C)Humidity Up to 95% non-condensingMechanical Drop Operational after 50 drops from 3.28 feet (1 m) to concreteVibration 5G Peak from 22Hz to 300HzESD Sensitivity Up to 15kV direct airUp to 8 kV indirect coupling plane
12 - 7CCB02-100BT Industrial Charge Base Product SpecificationsParameter SpecificationDimensions (Typical):Height 2.6 in. (6.6cm)Length 9.8 in. (24.98mm)Width 4.05 in. (10.28cm)Weight 10.05 oz. (285g)Voltage: 4.5 to 5.5 voltsCurrent Draw:Host Terminal Port 500mAAux Power Port 1ACharge Time 5 hoursRadio:Frequency 2.4 to 2.5 GHz (ISM Band) Frequency Hopping Bluetooth v.2.1Range 330 ft. (100m) typicalData Rate Up to 1 MBpsTemperature Ranges:Operating -4° F to +122° F (-20° C to +50° C)Battery Charge 41° F to +104° F (5° C to +40° C)Storage -40° F to +158° F (-40° C to +70° C)Humidity Up to 95% non-condensingMechanical Drop Operational after 50 drops from 3.94 feet (1.2m) to concreteVibration Complies with MIL-STD-810G, Method 514.6, Annex CESD Sensitivity Up to 20kV direct airUp to 8 kV indirect coupling plane
12 - 8Depth of Field ChartsXenon B&W Scanner Typical PerformanceFocus High Density (HD)Standard Range (SR)Extended Range (ER)Symbology Near Distance Far Distance Near Distance Far Distance Near Distance Far Distance5 mil Code 39 in. .2 3.8 1.6  5.3  3.7  8 mm 5.1 96.5 40.6 134.6 94 203.213 mil UPC in. .5  6.5  .3  16.7 1  20.7mm 12.7 165.1 7.6 424.2 25.4 525.820 mil Code 39 in. .6  8.6  .4  24.6  123.5 mm 15.2 218.4 10.2 624.8 25.4 596.96.7 mil PDF417 in. .4 4  .7  62.8  9.2 mm 10.2 101.6 17.8 152.4 71.1 233.710 mil Data Matrixin. .3 4.2 .8  7  2.5  11.3 mm 7.6 106.7 20.3 177.8 63.5 28720 mil QR Code in. .7  7  .5  14.8 .7  19 mm 17.8 177.8 12.7 375.9 17.8 482.6Resolution (1D Code 39) 3 mil (.076mm) 5 mil (.127mm) 5 mil (.127mm)Resolution (2D Data Matrix) 5 mil (.127mm) 6.7 mil (.170mm) 7.5 mil (.191mm)
12 - 9 Xenon B&W Scanner Guaranteed PerformanceFocus High Density (HD)Standard Range (SR)Extended Range (ER)Symbology Near Distance Far Distance Near Distance Far Distance Near Distance Far Distance5 mil Code 39 in. .3 3.3 2.1 5.1 4.2 7.8mm 7.62 83.8 53.3 129.5 106.7 198.113 mil UPC in. .7 6.1 .4 15.6 1.1 19.7mm 17.8 154.9 10.2 396.2 27.9 500.420 mil Code 39 in. .7 7.8 .5 20.2 1.5 25mm 17.8 198.1 12.7 513.1 38.1 6356.7 mil PDF417 in. .5 3.8 .9 5.8 3.3 8.7mm 12.7 96.5 22.9 147.3 83.8 22110 mil Data Matrixin. .4 3.8 .9 6.6 3.4 10.3mm 10.2 96.5 22.9 167.6 86.4 261.620 mil QR Code in. 1.2 6.4 .7 13 .9 18mm 30.5 162.6 17.8 330.2 22.9 457.2Resolution (1D Code 39) 3 mil (.076mm) 5 mil (.127mm) 5 mil (.127mm)Resolution (2D Data Matrix) 5 mil (.127mm) 6.7 mil (.170mm) 7.5 mil (.191mm)
12 - 10 Xenon Color Scanner (Model COL) Typical PerformanceFocus High Density (HD) Standard Range (SR)Symbology Near Distance Far Distance Near Distance Far Distance5 mil Code 39 in. 03.6  1.1  5.2mm 0 91.4 27.9 132.113 mil UPC in. .4  5.9 .4  16.2mm 10.2 149.9 10.2 411.520 mil Code 39 in. .4  8.4 .5  22mm 10.2 213.4 12.7 558.86.7 mil PDF417 in. 03.8 .4  6mm 0 96.5 10.2 152.410 mil Data Matrixin. 04.2 .5  7mm 0106.7 12.7 177.820 mil QR Code in. .4  6.8 .6  13.4mm 10.2 172.7 15.2 340.4Resolution (1D Code 39) 3 mil (.076mm) 5 mil (.127mm)Resolution (2D Data Matrix) 5 mil (.127mm) 6.7 mil (.170mm)
12 - 11Xenon Color Scanner (Model COL) Guaranteed Performance Granit Scanner Typical Performance Focus High Density (HD)Standard Range (SR)Symbology Near Distance Far Distance Near Distance Far Distance5 mil Code 39 in. 03.3 1.7 4.9mm 083.8 43.2 124.513 mil UPC in. .6 5.2 .4 14.5mm 15.2 132.1 10.2 368.320 mil Code 39 in. .5 7.4 .5 17.5mm 12.7 188 12.7 444.56.7 mil PDF417 in. 03.4 .5 5.7mm 086.4 12.7 144.810 mil Data Matrix in. 0 4 .8 6.4mm 0101.6 20.3 162.620 mil QR Code in. .7 6.2 .7 12.3mm 17.8 157.5 17.8 312.4Resolution (1D Code 39) 3 mil (.076mm) 5 mil (.127mm)Resolution (2D Data Matrix) 5 mil (.127mm) 6.7 mil (.170mm)Focus Extended Range (ER)Symbology Near Distance Far Distance5 mil Code 39 in. 3.6 7.4mm 91.4 18820 mil Code 39 in. .6 29.5mm 15.2 749.3100% UPC in. .6 21.4mm 15.2 543.66.7 mil PDF417 in. 2.7 8.9mm 68.6 226.1
12 - 12 Granit Scanner Guaranteed Performance10 mil Data Matrix in. 2.8 10.3mm 71.1 261.620 mil QR Code in. .8 19.5mm 20.3 495.3Resolution (1D Code 39) 5 mil (.127mm)Resolution (2D Data Matrix) 7.5 mil (.191mm)Focus Extended Range (ER)Symbology Near Distance Far Distance5 mil Code 39 in. 3.8 7.2mm 96.5 182.920 mil Code 39 in. 1 28.7mm 25.4 729100% UPC in. .6 21.7mm 15.2 551.26.7 mil PDF417 in. 38.5mm 76.2 215.910 mil Data Matrix in. 3.1 9.7mm 78.7 246.420 mil QR Code in. .9 19.8mm 22.9 502.9Resolution (1D Code 39) 5 mil (.127mm)Resolution (2D Data Matrix) 7.5 mil (.191mm)Focus Extended Range (ER)
12 - 13Standard Connector PinoutsNote: The following pin assignments are not compatible with Honeywell legacy products.  Use of a cable with improper pin assignments may lead to damage to the unit.  Use of any cables not provided by the manufacturer may result in damage not covered by your warranty. Keyboard Wedge10 Pin RJ41 Modular Plug - connects to the baseSerial Output10 Pin RJ41 Modular Plug - connects to the base 1 Cable shield2Cable select3 Supply ground4 Terminal data5 Terminal clock6 Keyboard clock7 Supply power input +5V power8 Keyboard data91 Cable shield2 Cable select3 Supply ground4 Transmit data5 Receive data - serial data to scanner6CTS7 +5V power8RTS910
12 - 14RS485 Output10 Pin RJ41 Modular Plug - connects to the baseNote: RS485 signal conversion is performed in the cable. USB10 Pin Modular Plug - connects to the base1 Cable shield2 Cable select3 Supply ground4 Transmit data5 Receive data - serial data to scanner67 +5V power8 Transmit Enable9101 Cable shield2 Cable select3 Supply ground4567 +5V power89 Data +
13 - 113MaintenanceRepairsRepairs and/or upgrades are not to be performed on this product.  These ser-vices are to be performed only by an authorized service center (see Customer Support on page 14-1).MaintenanceYour device provides reliable and efficient operation with a minimum of care.  Although specific maintenance is not required, the following periodic checks ensure dependable operation:Cleaning the ScannerThe scanner or base’s housing may be cleaned with a soft cloth or tissue dampened with water (or a mild detergent-water solution.)  If a detergent solution is used, rinse with a clean tissue dampened with water only.Cleaning the WindowReading performance may degrade if the scanner’s window is not clean.  If the window is visibly dirty, or if the scanner isn’t operating well, clean the window with one of the cleaning solutions listed for Health Care Housing, below.Health Care HousingSome configurations of Xenon scanners are available with an external plastic housing that is designed to resist the effects of harsh chemicals in a health care environment. The plastic is crystalline in nature, which helps prevent chemicals from seeping through the housing.Do not submerge the scanner in water. The scanner’s housing is not watertight. Do not use abrasive wipes or tissues on the scanner’s window – abrasive wipes may scratch the window.  Never use solvents (e.g., acetone) on the housing or window – solvents may damage the finish or the window.!Caution:Do not submerge the scanner in water. The scanner’s housing is not watertight. Do not use abrasive wipes or tissues on the scanner’s window – abrasive wipes may scratch the window.  Never use solvents (e.g., acetone) on the housing or window – solvents may damage the finish or the window.
13 - 2Important! The following cleaning solutions have been tested to assure safe cleaning of your scanner’s disinfectant-ready housing. They are the only solutions approved for use with these scanners. Damage caused by the use of cleaners other than those listed below may not be covered by the warranty.• Sani-Cloth® HB wipes• Sani-Cloth® Plus wipes• Super Sani-Cloth® wipes• Isopropyl Alcohol wipes (70%)•CaviWipes™•Virex® 256•409® Glass and Surface Cleaner•Windex® Blue•Clorox® Bleach – 10%• Gentle dish soap and waterInspecting Cords and ConnectorsInspect the interface cable and connector for wear or other signs of dam-age.  A badly worn cable or damaged connector may interfere with scanner operation.  Contact your distributor for information about cable replace-ment.  Cable replacement instructions are on page 13-2.Replacing Cables in Corded ScannersThe standard interface cable is attached to the scanner with an 10-pin modular connector.  When properly seated, the connector is held in the scanner’s handle by a flexible retention tab.  The interface cable is designed to be field replace-able.• Order replacement cables from Honeywell or from an authorized distributor.• When ordering a replacement cable, specify the cable part number of the original interface cable.
13 - 3Replacing a Xenon Interface Cable1. Turn the power to the host sys-tem OFF.2. Disconnect the scanner’s cable from the terminal or computer.3. Locate the small hole on the back of the scanner’s handle.  This is the cable release.4. Straighten one end of a paper clip.5. Insert the end of the paper clip into the small hole and press in.  This depresses the retention tab, releasing the connector.  Pull the connector out while maintaining pressure on the paper clip, then remove the paper clip.6. Replace with the new cable.  Insert the connector into the opening and press firmly.  The connector is keyed to go in only one way, and will click into place.Replacing a Granit Interface Cable1. Turn the power to the host system OFF.2. Disconnect the scanner’s cable from the terminal or computer.3. Unscrew the locking plate on the bottom of the scanner.4. Slide the locking plate away from the connector and pull the cable out of the scanner.5. Replace with the new cable.  Insert the connector into the opening and press firmly.  6. Slide the locking plate over the base of the connector to secure the cable, and screw the plate into place.CableRelease
13 - 4Replacing Cables and Batteries in Cordless SystemsReplacing an Interface Cable in a Base1. Turn the power to the host system OFF.2. Disconnect the base’s cable from the terminal or computer.3. Turn the base upside down.4. Pull the connector out while maintaining pressure on the connector release clip.5. Replace with the new cable.  Insert the connector into the opening and press firmly.  The connector is keyed to go in only one way, and will click into place.CCB01-010BT Base : CCB02-100BT Base :
13 - 5Changing a Xenon Scanner Battery1. Use a Phillips head screw-driver to remove the screw from the end cap.2. Remove the end cap and remove the battery from the handle.3. Insert replacement battery.4. Replace end cap and screw.Changing a Granit Scanner Battery1. Twist the tab in the bottom of the end cap and open the hinged battery door.  2. Remove the battery from the handle.3. Insert replacement battery.4. Close the battery door and twist the tab to lock it.Note: The battery door is designed to pop off the hinge if the scanner is dropped while changing a battery.  If this occurs, simply snap it back on.Troubleshooting a Corded ScannerThe scanner automatically performs self-tests whenever you turn it on.  If your scanner is not functioning properly, review the following Troubleshoot-ing Guide to try to isolate the problem.Is the power on?  Is the aimer on? If the aimer isn’t illuminated, check that:• The cable is connected properly.• The host system power is on (if external power isn’t used).• The trigger works.End Cap
13 - 6Is the scanner having trouble reading your symbols?If the scanner isn’t reading symbols well, check that the symbols:• Aren’t smeared, rough, scratched, or exhibiting voids.• Aren’t coated with frost or water droplets on the surface.• Are enabled in the scanner or in the decoder to which the scanner connects.Is the bar code displayed but not entered?The bar code is displayed on the host device correctly, but you still have to press a key to enter it (the Enter/Return key or the Tab key, for example).• You need to program a suffix.  Programming a suffix enables the scanner to output the bar code data plus the key you need (such as “CR”) to enter the data into your application.  Refer to Prefix/Suffix Overview on page 5-1 for further information.Does the scanner read the bar code incorrectly?If the scanner reads a bar code, but the data is not displayed correctly on the host screen:• The scanner may not be programmed for the appropriate terminal interface. For example, you scan “12345” and the host displays “@es%.”Reprogram the scanner with the correct Plug and Play bar code.  See Programming the Interface beginning on page 2-1.• The scanner may not be programmed to output your bar code data properly.For example, you scan “12345” and the host displays “A12345B.”Reprogram the scanner with the proper symbology selections.  See Chapter 7.The scanner won’t read your bar code at all.1. Scan the sample bar codes in the back of this manual.  If the scanner reads the sample bar codes, check that your bar code is readable.Verify that your bar code symbology is enabled (see Chapter 7).  2. If the scanner still can’t read the sample bar codes, scan All Symbologies On, page 7-2.If you aren’t sure what programming options have been set in the scanner, or if you want the factory default settings restored, refer to Resetting the Factory Defaults on page 1-16.Troubleshooting a Cordless SystemTroubleshooting a BaseNote: Visit the Services and Support section of our website (www.honeywellaidc.com) to check for the latest software for both the scanner and the base.
13 - 7If your base is not functioning properly, review the following troubleshooting guidelines to try to isolate the problem.Is the red LED on? If the red LED isn’t illuminated, check that:• The power cable is connected properly and there is power at the power source.• The host system power is on (if external power isn’t used).Is the green LED on? If the green LED isn’t illuminated, check that:• The scanner is correctly placed in the base.• There is external power or 12 volt host power.• Charge mode is turned on.  (See  "Beeper and LED Sequences and Meaning" on page 3-7)• The battery is not bad or deeply discharged.  In some cases, the scanner’s battery may trickle charge to bring it into an acceptable level and then transition to a normal charge cycle.Troubleshooting a Cordless ScannerNote: Make sure that your scanner’s battery is charged.Visit the Services and Support section of our website (www.honeywellaidc.com) to check for the latest software for both the scanner and the base or Access Point.Is the scanner having trouble reading your symbols?If the scanner isn’t reading symbols well, check that the symbols:• Aren’t smeared, rough, scratched, or exhibiting voids.• Aren’t coated with frost or water droplets on the surface.• Are enabled in the base or Access Point to which the scanner connects.Is the bar code displayed but not entered into the application?The bar code is displayed on the host device correctly, but you still have to press a key to enter it (the Enter/Return key or the Tab key, for example).• You need to program a suffix.  Programming a suffix enables the scanner to output the bar code data plus the key you need (such as “CR”) to enter the data into your application.  Refer to Prefix/Suffix Overview on page 5-1 for further information.Does the scanner read the bar code incorrectly?If the scanner reads a bar code, but the data is not displayed correctly on the host screen:• The base or Access Point may not be programmed for the appropriate terminal interface.  For example, you scan “12345” and the host displays “@es%.”Reprogram the base/Access Point with the correct Plug and Play bar code.  See Programming the Interface beginning on page 2-1.
13 - 8• The bas or Access Pointe may not be programmed to output your bar code data properly.  For example, you scan “12345” and the host displays “A12345B.”Reprogram the base/Access Point with the proper symbology selections.  See Chapter 7.The scanner won’t read your bar code at all.• Scan the sample bar codes in the back of this manual.  If the scanner reads the sample bar codes, check that your bar code is readable.Verify that your bar code symbology is enabled (see Chapter 7).  If the scanner still can’t read the sample bar codes, scan All Symbologies on page 7-2.
14 - 114Customer SupportTechnical AssistanceIf you need assistance installing or troubleshooting your device, please contact us by using one of the methods below:Knowledge Base: www.hsmknowledgebase.comOur Knowledge Base provides thousands of immediate solutions. If the Knowledge Base cannot help, our Technical Support Portal (see below) provides an easy way to report your problem or ask your question.Technical Support Portal: www.hsmsupportportal.comThe Technical Support Portal not only allows you to report your problem, but it also provides immediate solutions to your technical issues by searching our Knowledge Base.  With the Portal, you can submit and track your questions online and send and receive attachments. Web form: www.hsmcontactsupport.comYou can contact our technical support team directly by filling out our online support form.  Enter your contact details and the description of the question/problem.Telephone: www.honeywellaidc.com/locationsFor our latest contact information, please check our website at the link above.Product Service and RepairHoneywell International Inc. provides service for all of its products through service centers throughout the world.  To obtain warranty or non-warranty service, please visit www.honeywellaidc.com and select Support > Contact Service and Repair to see your region's instructions on how to obtain a Return Material Authorization number (RMA #).  You should do this prior to returning the product.Limited WarrantyHoneywell International Inc. ("HII") warrants its products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship and to conform to HII’s published specifications applicable to the products purchased at the time of shipment.  This warranty does not cover any HII product which is (i) improperly installed or used; (ii) dam-aged by accident or negligence, including failure to follow the proper mainte-nance, service, and cleaning schedule; or (iii) damaged as a result of (A) modification or alteration by the purchaser or other party, (B) excessive voltage or current supplied to or drawn from the interface connections, (C) static elec-tricity or electro-static discharge, (D) operation under conditions beyond the specified operating parameters, or (E) repair or service of the product by any-one other than HII or its authorized representatives.
14 - 2This warranty shall extend from the time of shipment for the duration published by HII for the product at the time of purchase ("Warranty Period").  Any defective product must be returned (at purchaser’s expense) during the Warranty Period to HII factory or authorized service center for inspection.  No product will be accepted by HII without a Return Materials Authorization, which may be obtained by contacting HII.  In the event that the product is returned to HII or its authorized service center within the Warranty Period and HII determines to its satisfaction that the product is defective due to defects in materials or workman-ship, HII, at its sole option, will either repair or replace the product without charge, except for return shipping to HII.EXCEPT AS MAY BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER COVENANTS OR WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, ORAL OR WRITTEN, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-CHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.HII’S RESPONSIBILITY AND PURCHASER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE PRODUCT WITH NEW OR REFURBISHED PARTS.  IN NO EVENT SHALL HII BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSE-QUENTIAL DAMAGES, AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL ANY LIABILITY OF HII ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT SOLD HEREUNDER (WHETHER SUCH LIABILITY ARISES FROM A CLAIM BASED ON CON-TRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE ACTUAL AMOUNT PAID TO HII FOR THE PRODUCT.  THESE LIMITATIONS ON LIA-BILITY SHALL REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT EVEN WHEN HII MAY HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INJURIES, LOSSES, OR DAMAGES.  SOME STATES, PROVINCES, OR COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-QUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.All provisions of this Limited Warranty are separate and severable, which means that if any provision is held invalid and unenforceable, such determina-tion shall not affect the validity of enforceability of the other provisions hereof.  Use of any peripherals not provided by the manufacturer may result in damage not covered by this warranty. This includes but is not limited to: cables, power supplies, cradles, and docking stations. HII extends these warranties only to the first end-users of the products.  These warranties are non-transferable.The duration of the limited warranty for the Xenon 1900 and 1910 scanners is five (5) years. The duration of the limited warranty for the Xenon 1902 and 1912 scanners and CCB01-010BT Charge Base is three (3) years.  The duration of the limited warranty for the Granit 1910i and 1911i scanners and CCB02-100BT Charge Base is three (3) years.  The duration of the limited warranty for the Xenon or Granit battery is one (1) year.
A - 1AReference ChartsSymbology ChartsNote: “m” represents the AIM modifier character.  Refer to International Technical Specification, Symbology Identifiers, for AIM modifier character details.Prefix/Suffix entries for specific symbologies override the universal (All Symbologies, 99) entry.Refer to Data Editing beginning on page 5-1 and Data Formatting beginning on page 6-1 for information about using Code ID and AIM ID.Linear SymbologiesAIM HoneywellSymbology IDPossible  modifiers (m)ID HexAll Symbologies99Codabar ]Fm0-1 a 61Code 11 ]H3 h 68Code 128 ]Cm0, 1, 2, 4 j 6ACode 32 Pharmaceutical (PARAF)]X0 < 3CCode 39 (supports Full ASCII mode)]Am0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 b 62TCIF Linked Code 39 (TLC39)]L2 T 54Code 93 and 93i ]Gm0-9, A-Z, a-mi69EAN ]Em0, 1, 3, 4 d 64EAN-13 (including Bookland EAN)]E0 d 64EAN-13 with Add-On ]E3 d 64EAN-13 with Extended Coupon Code]E3 d 64EAN-8 ]E4 D 44EAN-8 with Add-On ]E3 D 44
A - 2GS1GS1 DataBar ]em0y79GS1 DataBar Limited ]em{ 7BGS1 DataBar Expanded ]em}7DGS1-128 ]C1 I 492 of 5China Post (Hong Kong 2 of 5)]X0 Q 51Interleaved 2 of 5 ]Im0, 1, 3 e 65Matrix 2 of 5 ]X0 m 6DNEC 2 of 5 ]X0 Y 59Straight 2 of 5 IATA ]Rm0, 1, 3 f 66Straight 2 of 5 Industrial  ]S0 f 66MSI ]Mm0, 1 g 67Telepen ]Bmt74UPC 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, A, B, CUPC-A ]E0 c 63UPC-A with Add-On ]E3 c 63UPC-A with Extended Coupon Code]E3 c 63UPC-E ]E0 E 45UPC-E with Add-On ]E3 E 45UPC-E1 ]X0 E 45Add Honeywell Code ID 5C80Add AIM Code ID 5C81Add Backslash 5C5CBatch mode quantity 5 35AIM HoneywellSymbology IDPossible  modifiers (m)ID Hex
A - 32D SymbologiesPostal SymbologiesAIM HoneywellSymbology IDPossible  modifiers (m)ID HexAll Symbologies99Aztec Code ]zm0-9, A-C z 7AChinese Sensible Code (Han Xin Code)]X0 H 48Codablock A ]O6 0, 1, 4, 5, 6 V 56Codablock F ]Om0, 1, 4, 5, 6 q 71Code 49 ]Tm0, 1, 2, 4 l 6CData Matrix ]dm0-6 w 77GS1 ]em0-3GS1 Composite  ]em0-3 y 79GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional]emy79MaxiCode ]Um0-3 x 78PDF417 ]Lm0-2 r 72MicroPDF417 ]Lm3-5 R 52QR Code  ]Qm0-6 s 73Micro QR Code ]Qms73AIM HoneywellSymbology IDPossible  modifiers (m)ID HexAll Symbologies99Australian Post ]X0 A 41British Post ]X0 B 42Canadian Post ]X0 C 43
A - 4ASCII Conversion Chart (Code Page 1252)In keyboard applications, ASCII Control Characters can be represented in 3 dif-ferent ways, as shown below.  The CTRL+X function is OS and application dependent.  The following table lists some commonly used Microsoft functional-ity.  This table applies to U.S. style keyboards.  Certain characters may differ depending on your Country Code/PC regional settings. China Post ]X0 Q 51InfoMail ]X0 , 2cIntelligent Mail Bar Code  ]X0 M 4DJapanese Post ]X0 J 4AKIX (Netherlands) Post ]X0 K 4BKorea Post ]X0 ? 3FPlanet Code ]X0 L 4CPostal-4i ]X0 N 4EPostnet ]X0 P 50Non-printable            ASCII control charactersKeyboard Control + ASCII (CTRL+X) Mode Control + X Mode Off (KBDCAS0)Windows Mode Control + X Mode On (KBDCAS2)DEC HEX Char CTRL + X CTRL + X function000 NUL Reserved CTRL+ @  101 SOH NP Enter CTRL+ A Select all202 STX Caps Lock CTRL+ B Bold303 ETX ALT Make CTRL+ C Copy404 EOT ALT Break CTRL+ D Bookmark505 ENQ CTRL Make CTRL+ E Center606 ACK CTRL Break CTRL+ F Find707 BEL Enter / Ret CTRL+ G  808 BS(Apple Make)CTRL+ H History909 HT Tab CTRL+ I Italic10 0A LF(Apple Break)CTRL+ J JustifyAIM HoneywellSymbology IDPossible  modifiers (m)ID Hex
A - 5Lower ASCII Reference TableNote: Windows Code page 1252 and lower ASCII use the same characters. 11 0B VT Tab CTRL+ K hyperlink12 0C FF Delete CTRL+ L list, left align13 0D CR Enter / Ret CTRL+ M  14 0E SO Insert CTRL+ N New15 0F SI ESC CTRL+ O Open16 10 DLE F11 CTRL+ P Print17 11 DC1 Home CTRL+ Q Quit18 12 DC2 PrtScn CTRL+ R  19 13 DC3 Backspace CTRL+ S Save20 14 DC4 Back Tab CTRL+ T  21 15 NAK F12 CTRL+ U  22 16 SYN F1 CTRL+ V Paste 23 17 ETB F2 CTRL+ W  24 18 CAN F3 CTRL+ X  25 19 EM F4 CTRL+ Y  26 1A SUB F5 CTRL+ Z  27 1B ESC F6 CTRL+ [  28 1C FS F7 CTRL+ \  29 1D GS F8 CTRL+ ]  30 1E RS F9 CTRL+ ^  31 1F US F10 CTRL+ -  127 7F ⌂NP Enter  Printable CharactersDEC HEX Character DEC HEX Character DEC HEX Character 32 20 <SPACE> 64 40 @96 60 `33 21 !65 41 A97 61 a34 22 "66 42 B98 62 b35 23 #67 43 C99 63 cNon-printable            ASCII control charactersKeyboard Control + ASCII (CTRL+X) Mode Control + X Mode Off (KBDCAS0)Windows Mode Control + X Mode On (KBDCAS2)DEC HEX Char CTRL + X CTRL + X function
A - 636 24 $68 44 D100 64 d37 25 %69 45 E101 65 e38 26 &70 46 F102 66 f39 27 '71 47 G103 67 g40 28 (72 48 H104 68 h41 29 )73 49 I105 69 i42 2A *74 4A J106 6A j43 2B +75 4B K107 6B k44 2C ,76 4C L108 6C l45  2D -77 4D M109 6D m46 2E .78 4E N110 6E n47 2F /79 4F O111 6F o48 30 080 50 P112 70 p49 31 181 51 Q113 71 q50 32 282 52 R114 72 r51 33 383 53 S115 73 s52 34 484 54 T116 74 t53 35 585 55 U117 75 u54 36 686 56 V118 76 v55 37 787 57 W119 77 w56 38 888 58 X120 78 x57 39 989 59 Y121 79 y58 3A :90 5A Z122 7A z59 3B ;91 5B [123 7B {60 3C <92 5C \124 7C |61 3D =93 5D ]125 7D }62 3E >94 5E ^126 7E ~63 3F ?95 5F _127 7F ⌂Extended ASCII CharactersDEC HEX CP 1252 ASCII Alternate Extended PS2 Scan Code128 80 €€ Ç up arrow ↑0x48129 81 üdown arrow ↓0x50130 82 ‚éright arrow →0x4B131 83 ƒâleft arrow ←0x4D132 84 „äInsert 0x52133 85 …àDelete 0x53Printable Characters (Continued)DEC HEX Character DEC HEX Character DEC HEX Character
A - 7134 86 †åHome 0x47135 87 ‡çEnd 0x4F136 88 ˆê Page Up 0x49137 89 ‰ ë Page Down 0x51138 8A Š è Right ALT 0x38139 8B ‹ ï Right CTRL 0x1D140 8C ŒîReserved n/a141 8D ìReserved n/a142 8E Ž Ä Numeric Keypad Enter 0x1C143 8F Å Numeric Keypad / 0x35144 90 ÉF1 0x3B145 91 ‘æF2 0x3C146 92 ’ÆF3 0x3D147 93 “ôF4 0x3E148 94 ”öF5 0x3F149 95 •òF6 0x40150 96 –ûF7 0x41151 97 —ùF8 0x42152 98 ˜ÿF9 0x43153 99 ™ÖF10 0x44154 9A šÜF11 0x57155 9B ›¢F12 0x58156 9C œ £ Numeric Keypad + 0x4E157 9D ¥ Numeric Keypad - 0x4A158 9E ž₧Numeric Keypad * 0x37159 9F Ÿ ƒ Caps Lock 0x3A160 A0  á Num Lock 0x45161 A1 ¡íLeft Alt 0x38162 A2 ¢óLeft Ctrl 0x1D163 A3 £úLeft Shift 0x2A164 A4 ¤ñRight Shift 0x36165 A5 ¥ÑPrint Screen n/a166 A6 ¦ªTab 0x0F167 A7 §ºShift Tab 0x8F168 A8 ¨¿Enter 0x1C169 A9 ©⌐Esc 0x01170 AA ª¬Alt Make 0x36171 AB «½Alt Break 0xB6172 AC ¬¼Control Make 0x1DExtended ASCII Characters (Continued)DEC HEX CP 1252 ASCII Alternate Extended PS2 Scan Code
A - 8173 AD ¡Control Break 0x9D174 AE ®«Alt Sequence with 1 Character 0x36175 AF ¯»Ctrl Sequence with 1 Character 0x1D176 B0 °░177 B1 ±▒178 B2 ²▓179 B3 ³│180 B4 ´┤181 B5 µ╡182 B6 ¶╢183 B7 ·╖184 B8 ¸╕185 B9 ¹╣186 BA º║187 BB »╗188 BC ¼╝189 BD ½╜190 BE ¾╛191 BF ¿┐192 C0 À└193 C1 Á┴194 C2 Â┬195 C3 Ã├196 C4 Ä─197 C5 Åí198 C6 Æ╞199 C7 Ç╟200 C8 È╚201 C9 É╔202 CA Ê╩203 CB Ë╦204 CC Ì╠205 CD Í═206 CE Î╬207 CF Ï╧208 D0 Ð╨209 D1 Ñ╤210 D2 Ò╥211 D3 Ó╙Extended ASCII Characters (Continued)DEC HEX CP 1252 ASCII Alternate Extended PS2 Scan Code
A - 9212 D4 Ô╘213 D5 Õ╒214 D6 Ö╓215 D7 ×╫216 D8 Ø╪217 D9 Ù┘218 DA Ú┌219 DB Û█220 DC Ü▄221 DD Ý▌222 DE Þ▐223 DF ß▀224 E0 àα225 E1 áß226 E2 âΓ227 E3 ãπ228 E4 äΣ229 E5 åσ230 E6 æµ231 E7 çτ232 E8 èΦ233 E9 éΘ234 EA êΩ235 EB ëδ236 EC ì∞237 ED íφ238 EE îε239 EF ï∩240 F0 ð≡241 F1 ñ±242 F2 ò≥243 F3 ó≤244 F4 ô⌠245 F5 õ⌡246 F6 ö÷247 F7 ÷≈248 F8 ø°249 F9 ù·250 FA ú·Extended ASCII Characters (Continued)DEC HEX CP 1252 ASCII Alternate Extended PS2 Scan Code
A - 10ISO 2022/ISO 646 Character ReplacementsCode pages define the mapping of character codes to characters.  If the data received does not display with the proper characters, it may be because the bar code being scanned was created using a  code page that is different from the one the host program is expecting.  If this is the case, select the code page with which the bar codes were created.  The data characters should then appear properly.251 FB û√252 FC üⁿ253 FD ý²254 FE þ■255 FF ÿ Code Page Selection Method/CountryStandard Keyboard CountryHoneywell Code Page OptionUnited States (standard ASCII) ISO/IEC 646-IRV  n/a 1Automatic National Character Replacement ISO/IEC 2022  n/a 2 (default)Binary Code page  n/a  n/a 3Default “Automatic National Character replacement” will select the below Honeywell Code Page options for Code128, Code 39 and Code 93.United States ISO/IEC 646-06 0 1Canada ISO /IEC 646-121 54 95Canada ISO /IEC 646-122 18 96Japan ISO/IEC 646-14 28 98China ISO/IEC 646-57 92 99Great Britain (UK) ISO /IEC 646-04 7 87Extended ASCII Characters (Continued)DEC HEX CP 1252 ASCII Alternate Extended PS2 Scan Code
A - 11France ISO /IEC 646-69 3 83 Germany ISO/IEC646-21 4 84Switzerland ISO /IEC 646-CH 6 86Sweden / Finland (extended Annex C) ISO/IEC 646-11 2 82Ireland ISO /IEC 646-207 73 97Danmark ISO/IEC 646-08 8 88Norway ISO/IEC 646-60 9 94Italy ISO/IEC 646-15 5 85Portugal ISO/IEC 646-16 13 92Spain ISO/IEC 646-17 10 90Spain ISO/IEC 646-85 51 91Code Page Selection Method/CountryStandard Keyboard CountryHoneywell Code Page Option
A - 12Dec 35 36 64 91 92 93 94 96 123 124 125 126Hex 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7EUS 0 1 # $ @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ~CA 54 95 # $ à â ç ê î ô é ù è ûCA 18 96 # $ à â ç ê É ô é ù è ûJP 28 98 # $ @ [ ¥ ] ^ ` { | } CN 92 99 # ¥ @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } GB 787 £ $ @ [ \ ] ^ ` { | } ˜FR 383 £ $ à ° ç § ^ µ é ù è ¨DE 484 # $ § Ä Ö Ü ^ ` ä ö ü ßCH 6 86 ù $ à é ç ê î ô ä ö ü ûSE/FI 282 # ¤ É Ä Ö Å Ü é ä ö å üDK 888 # $ @ Æ Ø Å ^ ` æ ø å ˜NO 994 # $ @ Æ Ø Å ^ ` æ ø å ¨IE 73 97 £ $ Ó É Í Ú Á ó é í ú áIT 585 £ $ § ° ç é ^ ù à ò è ìPT 13 92 # $ § Ã Ç Õ ^ ` ã ç õ °ES 10 90 # $ § ¡ Ñ ¿ ^ ` ° ñ ç ˜ES 51 91 # $ · ¡ Ñ Ç ¿ ` ´ ñ ç ¨COUNTRYCountry KeyboardHoneywell CodePageISO / IEC 646 National Character Replacements
A - 13Unicode Key Maps6E 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E4B 50 554C 51 5601 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0F10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D1E2C1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2B392E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37534F 54 593A 3B 3C 3E 3F 38 403D5A 5F 645B 60 655C 61 665D 62 6763 68696A6C104 Key U.S. Style Keyboard6E 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E4B 50 554C 51 5601 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0F10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C1E2C1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 292B392E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37534F 54 593A 3B 3C 3E 3F 38 403D5A 5F 645B 60 655C 61 665D 62 6763 68696A6C2A2D105 Key European Style Keyboard
A - 14
Sample SymbolsUPC-A0  123456  7890 Interleaved 2 of 5Code 128EAN-13Code 39Codabar1234567890Code 1289  780330  290951BC321A13579BCode 93123456-9$ Straight 2 of 5 Industrial123456
Sample Symbols6543210 GS1 DataBar(01)00123456789012PDF417PostnetCar RegistrationZip CodeData MatrixQR Code Tes t SymbolNumbersMatrix 2 of 5ID-tag (UPU 4-State)J18CUSA8E6N062315014880T4-CB (4-State Customer Bar Code)01,234,567094,987654321,01234567891
Sample SymbolsAztecMaxiCodeMicro PDF417Package LabelTest MessageTest Message
Programming Chart1023675489
Programming ChartNote: If you make an error while scanning the letters or digits (before scanning Save), scan Discard, scan the correct letters or digits, and Save again.ACBFEDSaveDiscardReset
Honeywell Scanning & Mobility9680 Old Bailes RoadFort Mill, SC  29707www.honeywellaidc.comXenon-UG Rev G12/12

Navigation menu